Handbook On-line handbook
Select one of the following means of access to view your handbook on-line...
Find your handbook on the PEUGEOT website, under Scan this code for direct access to your handbook. "MyPEUGEOT".
This personal space offers advice and other useful information for the care and maintenance of your vehicle.
If the "MyPEUGEOT" function is not available on the PEUGEOT public website for your country, you can find your handbook at the following address: http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/ddb/
Select: the language, the vehicle, its body style, the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of registration of your vehicle.
Referring to the handbook on-line also gives you access to the latest information available, easily identified by the bookmark, associated with this symbol: Welcome
This handbook describes all of the equipment available in the whole range.
Your vehicle will be fitted with some of the equipment described in this Thank you for choosing a 2008. document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for the country in which it is sold. This handbook has been designed to help you make the most of using your vehicle in The descriptions and illustrations are given without any obligation. Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical all circumstances. specifications, equipment and accessories without having to update this edition of the handbook.
This document is an integral part of your vehicle. It should be passed on to the new user in the event of sale or transfer.
Key
safety warning additional information contributes to the protection of the environment Contents
Overview . Access Fittings Remote control key 43 Interior fittings 71 Doors 48 Boot fittings 75 Boot 50 Locking / unlocking from the inside 51 Alarm 52 Electric windows 54 Eco-driving .
Monitoring Comfort Driving Instrument panels 14 Front seats 56 Driving recommendations 79 Library of indicator and warning lamps 16 Rear seats 58 Starting - Switching off the engine 80 Gauges and indicators 28 Steering wheel adjustment 59 Manual parking brake 82 Touch screen 34 Mirrors 60 5-speed manual gearbox 83 Trip computer 38 Ventilation 62 6-speed manual gearbox 83 Distance recorders 41 Heating 65 5-speed electronic gearbox 84 Setting the date and time 42 Manual air conditioning 65 6-speed electronic gearbox 87 Dual-zone digital air conditioning 67 Automatic gearbox 91 Front demist - defrost 70 Automatic gearbox (EAT6) 95 Rear screen demist - defrost 70 Gear shift indicator 99 Stop & Start 100 Hill start assist 103 Speed limiter 104 Cruise control 106 Memorising speeds 108 Parking sensors 110 Reversing camera 112 Park Assist 113 Contents
Visibility Child safety Checks Lighting 117 Carrying children 156 Bonnet 234 Headlamp adjustment 124 Deactivating the passenger's front airbag 158 Petrol engines 235 Cornering lighting 125 ISOFIX child seats 165 Diesel engines 236 Wiper controls 126 Child lock 169 Checking levels 237 Lighting dimmer 130 Checks 240 Courtesy lamps 131 Interior mood lighting 132 Panoramic glazed sunroof 133
Technical data General information 242 Petrol engines 243 Safety Practical information Petrol weights 245 General safety recommendations 134 Fuel tank 170 Diesel engines 247 Direction indicators 135 Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 172 Diesel weights 249 Hazard warning lamps 135 Running out of fuel (Diesel) 174 Dimensions 252 Horn 136 AdBlue® and SCR system Identification markings 253 Emergency or assistance call 136 (BlueHDi Diesel) 175 Under-inflation detection 137 Temporary puncture repair kit 183 Changing a wheel 194 ESC system 140 Audio equipment and telematics Grip control 143 Snow chains 201 Emergency call 254 Active City Brake 145 Changing a bulb 202 Assistance call 255 Front seat belts 149 Changing a fuse 208 7-inch touch screen 257 Airbags 152 12 V battery 214 Electrical energy economy mode 219 Audio system / Bluetooth 327 Changing a wiper blade 220 Audio system 347 Towing 221 Towing a trailer 223 Towbar with quickly detachable towball 225 Fitting roof bars 230 Alphabetical index . Advice on care and maintenance 230 Accessories 231 Overview Exterior
Remote control key 43-47 - locking/unlocking the vehicle Wipers 126-129 - locating the vehicle Changing a wiper blade 129, 219 - guide-me-home lighting - anti-theft protection Panoramic glazed sunroof 133 - alarm - battery Roof bars 230 Boot 50 Starting - Switching off the engine 80-81 Accessories 231-232 - opening / closing - emergency release Temporary puncture repair kit 183-193 Lighting 117-123 LED lamps 121 Daytime running lamps 121 Parking sensors 110-111 Headlamp beam adjustment 124 Reversing camera 112 Cornering lighting 125 Park Assist 113-116 Changing bulbs 202-205 Towbar 223-229 - front lamps Towing 221-222 - foglamps - direction indicator repeaters Changing bulbs 206-207 - rear lamps Door mirrors 60 - 3rd brake lamp - number plate lamps - foglamp Electronic stability - reversing lamp Doors 48-49 programme (ESC) 140-142 - opening / closing Snow chains 201 - emergency control Tyre Fuel tank, misfuel Locking/unlocking from pressures 186, 193, 253 the inside 51 prevention 170-173 Changing a wheel 194-200 Alarm 52-53 - tools Electric windows 54-55 - removing / refitting
4 Overview . Interior
Boot fittings 75-78 Front seats 56-57 Interior fittings 71-74 - upper load retaining net - glove box - parcel shelf - 12 V accessory socket - boot lamp - retaining strap - USB port / Auxiliary socket - lashing rings - mats - storage net Deactivating the passenger's front - warning triangle airbag 153, 158
Child seats 156-164 ISOFIX child seats 165-168 Electric child lock 169 Airbags 152-155
Rear seats 58-59
Seat belts 149-151
5 Overview
Instruments and controls Touch screen 257-325
Courtesy lamps 131 Interior mood lighting 132 Rear view mirror 61 Bluetooth audio system 327-345 Emergency call / Assistance call 136, 254-255 Audio system 347-358
Heating, ventilation 65-69 Manual air conditioning 65-66 Dual-zone air conditioning 67-69 Front demisting / defrosting 70 Glove box fuses 208-209, 212 Rear screen emist/defrost 70
Door mirrors 60 Dashboard fuses 208-212 Electric windows, deactivating 54-55
Opening the bonnet 234 Manual gearbox 83 5-speed electronic gearbox 84-86 6-speed electronic gearbox 87-90 USB port / Auxiliary socket 72-73 Automatic gearbox 91-94 Automatic gearbox (EAT6) 95-98 Gear efficiency indicator 99 Parking brake 82 Stop & Start 100-102 Hill start assist 103
6 Overview .
Touch screen 34-37 Trip computer withthe touch Instrument panels 14-15 screen 38-39 Warning lamps 16-27 Setting the date/time with the touch Trip computer 38-40 screen 42 Distance recorders 41 Lighting dimmer with the touch Setting the date/time 42 screen 130 Indicators 28-33 Gear efficiency indicator 99 Lighting dimmer 130
Lighting controls 117-123 Direction indicators 135 Parking sensors 110-111 Park Assist 113-116 DSC/ASR system 140 Stop & Start 100-102 Hazard warning lamps 135 Under-inflation detection 137-139 Locking/unlocking from inside 51 Alarm 52-53 Electric child lock 169
Speed limiter 104-105 Cruise control 106-107 Headlamp beam adjustment 124 Memorising speeds 108-109
Steering wheel adjustment 59 Wiper controls 126-129 Grip control 143-144 Horn 136
7 Overview
8 Overview . Dashboard / centre console 1. Cruise control / speed limiter controls. 10. Side adjustable air vents. 19. Central locking and hazard warning 2. Steering mounted controls for the the touch 11. Front side window demisting/defrosting buttons. screen. vent. 20. Heating / air conditioning controls. 3. Wiper / screenwash / trip computer stalk. 12. Instrument panel. 21. 12 V accessory socket. 4. Driver's front airbag. 13. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vent. USB port / auxiliary socket. Horn. 14. Sunshine sensor. 22. Open storage. 5. Lighting and direction indicator stalk 15. Glove box / Passenger's front airbag Cup holder. 6. Bonnet release lever. deactivation. 23. Gear selector. 7. Steering wheel adjustment control. 16. Passenger's front airbag. 24. Grip control switch. 8. Headlamp height adjustment. 17. Touch screen / Audio system. 25. Parking brake. 9. Switch panel: 18. Central adjustable air vents. 26. Panoramic glazed sunroof blind opening A. Deactivation of the rear parking sensors and closing control. or 27. Closed storage compartment. Activation of Park Assist. 28. 12 V socket. B. Deactivation of the DSC/ASR system. C. Deactivation of the Stop & Start system. D. Reinitialisation of the under-inflation detection system (vehicle with touch screen). E. Deactivation of the volumetric alarm monitoring. F. Activation of the electric child lock.
9 Overview Maintenance - Technical data
12V battery 214-218 Load reduction, ® AdBlue and SCR system Running out of fuel, Diesel 174 energy economy mode 219 (BlueHDi Diesel) 175-182 Engine compartment Checking levels 237-239 fuses 208-209, 213 - oil - brake fluid - coolant Petrol weights 245-246 - screenwash fluid - additive (Diesel with particle filter) Diesel weights 249-251 Checking components 240-241 - battery - air / passenger compartment filter - oil filter - particle filter (Diesel) - brake pads / discs
Changing bulbs 202-207 - front - rear Identification markings 253 Dimensions 252 Opening the bonnet 234 Under the bonnet, petrol 235 Under the bonnet, Diesel 236 Petrol engines 243-244 Diesel engines 247-248
10 Overview .
11 Eco-driving
Eco-driving Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO2 emissions.
Optimise the use of your gearbox Control the use of your electrical equipment With a manual gearbox, move off gently and change up without waiting. Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it During acceleration change up early. by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning. Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents open. With an automatic or electronic gearbox, give preference to automatic Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly. temperature in the passenger compartment down (sunroof and window blinds...). Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic regulation, as The gear shift indicator invites you to engage the most suitable gear: soon as the desired temperature is attained. as soon as the indication is displayed in the instrument panel, follow it Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic. straight away. Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible. For vehicles fitted with an electronic or automatic gearbox, this indicator appears only in manual mode. Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the level of light does not require their use. Drive smoothly Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather vehicle will warm up much faster while driving. than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices CO2 emissions and also help to reduce the background traffic noise. (film, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel. If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle. above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well.
12 Eco-driving .
Limit the causes of excess consumption Observe the recommendations on maintenance Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats. the door aperture, driver's side. Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof Carry out this check in particular: bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in preference. - before a long journey, Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. - at each change of season, - after a long period out of use. Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit your summer tyres.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, oil filter, air filter, passenger compartment filter...) and observe the schedule of operations recommended in the manufacturer's service schedule.
With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system is faulty your vehicle becomes polluting; go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay to have the emissions of nitrous oxides brought back to the legal level.
When refuelling, do not continue after the third cut-off of the nozzle to avoid any overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the first 1 800 miles (3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to a consistent average.
13 Monitoring LCD instrument panel
Dials and screens Control buttons 1. Engine coolant temperature 6. Cruise control or speed limiter A. General lighting dimmer. gauge. settings. B. Recalling the service information. 2. Rev counter (x 1 000 rpm or tr/min), 7. Service indicator, then total distance Resetting the function selected (service graduation according to engine (petrol recorder (miles or km). indicator or trip distance recorder). or Diesel). These functions are displayed successively Setting the time. 3. Engine oil level indicator*. on switching on the ignition. Switching the digital speedometer on 4. Gear efficiency indicator for a manual 8. Trip distance recorder (miles or km). and off. gearbox or gear lever position and gear for 9. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h). an electronic or automatic gearbox. 10. Fuel gauge. 5. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h) This can be switched off with a long press on B.
* Depending on version. 14 Monitoring Matrix instrument panel 1
Dials and screens Control buttons 1. Engine coolant temperature 6. Service indicator, then total distance A. Main lighting dimmer. gauge. recorder (miles or km). B. Instrument panel mood lighting. 2. Rev counter (x 1 000 rpm or tr/min), These functions are displayed successively C. Recall of the service information. graduation according to engine (petrol on switching on the ignition. Reset the selected function (service or Diesel). 7. Trip distance recorder (miles or km). indicator or trip distance recorder). 3. Cruise control or speed limiter settings. 8. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h). 4. Gear efficiency indicator for a manual 9. Fuel gauge. gearbox or gear lever position and gear for an electronic or automatic gearbox. 5. Speedometer (mph or km/h).
15 Monitoring Library of indicator and warning lamps Indicator and warning lamps ● indicator lamp informing that a system is switched on, ● warning lamp for preventive purposes or for a fault.
When the ignition is switched on Associated warnings Certain warning lamps may come on in Certain warning lamps come on for a few The illumination of certain warning lamps one of two modes. Only by relating the seconds in the instrument panel and/or may be accompanied by an audible signal type of lighting to the operating status instrument panel screen when the vehicle's and a message in the instrument panel or of the vehicle can it be ascertained ignition is switched on. multifunction screen. whether the situation is normal or When the engine is started, these same The warning lamps may come on continuously whether a fault has occurred. warning lamps should go off. (fixed) or flash. If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the information in the table on the warning lamp concerned.
16 Monitoring 1
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Left-hand Flashing with audible The lighting stalk has been pushed When changing lane. direction indicator signal. down.
Right-hand Flashing with audible The lighting stalk has been pushed direction indicator signal. up.
Sidelamps fixed. The lighting stalk is in the "Sidelamps" position.
Dipped beam fixed. The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped headlamps beam headlamps" position.
Main beam fixed. The lighting stalk is pulled towards Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps. headlamps you.
Front foglamps fixed. The front foglamps are switched on Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk rearward using the ring on the lighting control once to switch off the front foglamps. stalk.
Rear foglamp fixed. The rear foglamp has been switched Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk to the rear to on using the ring on the lighting switch off the rear foglamp. control stalk.
For more information on the lighting controls, refer to the corresponding section.
17 Monitoring
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Diesel engine fixed. The key is at position 2 (ignition on) in Wait until the warning lamp goes off before starting. pre-heating the ignition switch. The period of illumination of the warning lamp is determined by the ambient conditions (up to about 30 seconds in very low temperatures). If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and then on, wait until the warning lamp goes off again, then start the engine.
Parking brake fixed. The parking brake is applied or not Release the parking brake to switch off the warning properly released. lamp, keeping your foot on the brake pedal. Observe the safety recommendations. For more information on the parking brake, refer to the corresponding section.
Foot on the fixed. The brake pedal must be pressed. With an electronic gearbox, press the brake pedal to brake pedal start the engine (lever in position N). With an automatic gearbox, with the engine running, press the brake pedal before releasing the parking brake, to unlock the lever and come out of position P. If you wish to release the parking brake without pressing the brake pedal, this warning lamp will remain on.
flashing. With an electronic gearbox, if you Use the brake pedal and/or the parking brake. hold the vehicle on an incline using the accelerator for too long, the clutch overheats.
18 Monitoring
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations 1 Foot on the fixed. In the STOP mode of Stop & Start, You must declutch fully to allow the change to engine clutch* changing to START mode is refused START mode. because the clutch pedal is not fully down.
Automatic fixed. The wiper control is pushed Automatic front wiping is activated. wiping downwards. To deactivate automatic wiping, operate the control stalk downwards or put the stalk into another position.
Stop & Start fixed. When the vehicle stops (red lights, The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts traffic jams, ...) the Stop & Start automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to system has put the engine into move off. STOP mode.
flashes for a few STOP mode is temporarily For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the seconds, then goes unavailable. corresponding section. off. Or START mode is invoked automatically.
* Except for the matrix instrument panel. 19 Monitoring
Deactivation indicator lamps If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally. This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Passenger's fixed. The control, located in the glove box, Set the control to the ON position to activate the airbag system is set to the OFF position. passenger's front airbag. The passenger's front airbag is In this case, do not fit a child seat in the rearward deactivated. facing position. You can install a rearward facing child seat, unless there is a fault with the operation of the airbags (Airbag warning lamp on).
20 Monitoring Warning lamps 1 When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, illumination of one of the following warning lamps indicates a fault which requires action on the part of the driver. Any fault resulting in the illumination of a warning lamp must be investigated further by reading the associated message in the screen. If you encounter any problems, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
STOP fixed, associated with Major faults have occurred. Stop as soon as it is safe to do so. another warning lamp. Park, switch off the ignition and call a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified workshop.
Service fixed, associated with Major faults have occurred. Refer to the section on this warning lamp and you another warning lamp. must then contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified workshop.
fixed, associated with Faults have occurred for which there Identify the fault by reading the message shown in the a message is no specific warning lamp. screen (if a display screen is fitted) and refer to the (if a display screen is corresponding section: fitted). - engine oil level alert, - risk of blockage of the particle filter (Diesel), - Diesel fuel additive level (Diesel with particle filter). You must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
21 Monitoring
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Braking fixed. The brake fluid level has dropped You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. significantly. Top up with brake fluid listed by PEUGEOT. If the problem persists, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
+ fixed, associated The electronic brake force distribution You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. with the ABS warning (EBFD) system has a fault. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified lamp. workshop.
Maximum fixed with the needle The temperature of the cooling Stop as soon as it is safe to do so. coolant in the red zone. system is too high. Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping temperature up the level, if necessary. If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Anti-lock fixed. The anti-lock braking system has a The vehicle retains conventional braking. Braking System fault. Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a (ABS) PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
22 Monitoring
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations 1 Dynamic flashing. The DSC/ASR regulation is The system optimises traction and improves the stability control operating. directional stability of the vehicle in the event of loss of (DSC/ASR) grip or trajectory.
fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Power steering fixed. The power steering has a fault. Drive carefully at reduced speed. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Engine fixed. The emission control system has a The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started. autodiagnosis fault. If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified system workshop without delay.
flashing. The engine management system has Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter. a fault. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed, associated with the A minor engine fault has been Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified SERVICE warning lamp. detected. workshop.
fixed, associated with A major engine fault has been You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. the STOP warning detected. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT lamp. dealer or a qualified workshop.
23 Monitoring
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
AdBlue® fixed, on switching The remaining driving range is Top-up the AdBlue® as soon as possible: go to (BlueHDi Diesel) on the ignition, between 350 miles (600 km) and a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, or carry accompanied by an 1500 miles (2400 km). out this operation yourself. audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range.
+ flashing, associated The remaining driving range is You must top-up the AdBlue® to avoid a breakdown: with the SERVICE between 0 and 350 miles (600 km). go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, or warning lamp, carry out this operation yourself. accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range.
flashing, associated The AdBlue® tank is empty: the To be able to start the engine, you must top-up the with the SERVICE starting inhibition system required AdBlue®: go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified warning lamp, by legislation prevents starting of workshop, or carry out this operation yourself. accompanied by an the engine. It is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of AdBlue® to audible signal and a the fluid tank message indicating that starting is prevented.
For topping-up or for more information on AdBlue®, refer to the corresponding section.
24 Monitoring
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations 1 SCR emissions fixed, on switching A fault with the SCR emissions This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions control system on the ignition, control system has been detected. return to normal levels. + (BlueHDi Diesel) associated with the SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning + lamps, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.
flashing, on switching After confirmation of the fault with the Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop on the ignition, emissions control system, you can without delay, to avoid a breakdown. associated with the drive for up to 650 miles (1 100 km) SERVICE and engine before the engine starting inhibition diagnostic warning system is triggered. lamps, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range.
flashing, on switching You have exceeded the authorised To be able to start the engine, you must call on a on the ignition, driving limit following confirmation PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. associated with the of a fault with the emissions SERVICE and engine control system: the engine starting diagnostic warning inhibition system prevents starting of lamps, accompanied the engine. by an audible signal and a message.
25 Monitoring
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Low fuel level fixed with the needle There remains approximately 5 litres Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of in the red zone. of fuel in the tank. fuel. At this point, you begin to use the fuel This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition reserve. is switched on, until a sufficient addition of fuel is made. flashing with the There remains very little fuel in the Fuel tank capacity: approximately 50 litres. needle in the red tank. Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, as zone. this could damage the emission control and injection systems.
Engine oil fixed. There is a fault with the engine You must stop as soon it is safe to do so. pressure lubrication system. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Battery charge* fixed. The battery charging circuit has a The warning lamp should go off when the engine is fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or started. cut alternator belt, ...). If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Under-inflation fixed. The pressure in one or more wheels Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible. is too low. This check should preferably be carried out when the tyres are cold.
+ flashing then fixed, The tyre pressure monitoring system Under-inflation detection is not assured. accompanied by the has a fault or no sensor is detected Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a Service warning lamp. on one of the wheels. qualified workshop.
* Depending on the country of sale. 26 Monitoring
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations 1 Door(s) open fixed, associated with A door or the boot is still open. Close the door or boot. a message identifying the door, if the speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h).
fixed, associated with a message identifying the door, together with an audible signal if the speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
Seat belt(s) fixed or flashing A seat belt has not been fastened or Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle. not fastened / accompanied by an has been unfastened. unfastened audible signal.
Airbags on temporarily. This lamp comes on for a few This lamp should go off when the engine is started. seconds when you turn on the If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a ignition, then goes off. qualified workshop.
fixed. One of the airbag or seat belt Have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a pretensioner systems has a fault. qualified workshop.
27 Monitoring Gauges and indicators More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km) Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) Service indicator remain before the next service is due remain before the next service is due System which informs the driver when the When the ignition is switched on, no service Example: 560 miles (900 km) remain before next service is due, in accordance with the information appears in the screen. the next service is due. manufacturer's servicing schedule. For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, The point at which the service is due is Between 600 miles (1 000 km) the screen indicates: calculated from the last reset of the indicator, and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain according to the mileage covered and the time before the next service is due elapsed since the last service. For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the degree of For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the deterioration of the engine oil is also taken into spanner symbolising the service operations comes account. on. The distance recorder display line indicates the distance remaining before the next service is due. Example: 1 700 miles (2 800 km) remain before 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the next service is due. the distance recorder resumes its normal For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the operation. The spanner remains on to screen indicates: indicate that a service must be carried out soon.
7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner goes off; the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The screen then indicates the total and trip distances.
28 Monitoring 1 Service overdue For BlueHDi Diesel versions, this For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the alert is also accompanied by the fixed spanner flashes to indicate that the service must illumination of the Service warning be carried out as soon as possible. lamp, when the ignition is switched on. Example: the service is overdue by 186 miles The distance remaining may be (300 km). weighted by the time factor, depending For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the on the driving conditions. screen indicates: Therefore, the spanner may also come on if you have exceeded the period since the last service, indicated in the warranty and maintenance record. For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the spanner can also come on early, according to the degree of deterioration 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, of the engine oil. The deterioration the distance recorder resumes its normal of the engine oil depends on the operation. The spanner remains on. conditions in which the vehicle is used.
29 Monitoring
Resetting the service Retrieving the service indicator information You can access the service information at any time. F Press the trip distance recorder reset button. The service information is displayed for a few seconds, then disappears.
After each service, the service indicator must be reset to zero. If you have carried out the service on your vehicle yourself: F switch off the ignition, F press and hold the trip distance recorder reset button, F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder display begins a countdown, F when the display indicates "=0", release the button; the spanner disappears.
If you have to disconnect the battery following this operation, lock the vehicle and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset to be registered.
30 Monitoring
Oil level Advice 1
Take care when working under the Dipstick Checking bonnet, as some parts of the engine For more information on the underbonnet F Open the bonnet and secure it with the can be very hot (risk of burns) and the and the engine oil dipstick, refer to the stay. cooling fan can start at any time (even corresponding section. F Pull the dipstick out and wipe it with a clean with the ignition switched off). There are 2 marks on the dipstick: cloth. If a level is found to be very low, have F - A = max; never exceed this Return the dipstick to its tube and then pull the corresponding system checked level, it out again to check the level against the by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified - B = min; top up the level via mark. workshop. F the oil filler cap, using the Return the dipstick to its tube. A check of the engine oil level is only grade of oil suited to your valid if the vehicle is on level ground engine. and the engine has been off for at least Low oil level 30 minutes. F Identify the engine oil filler cap. Oil grade: the oil used must meet F Open the filler cap. the specification given in the F Add engine oil with exceeding mark A. manufacturer's servicing and warranty F Fit the filler cap. booklet.
31 Monitoring
Electronic oil level indicator The check is done for a few seconds after switching on the ignition, with a message in the display or screen (depending on version). It is only valid if the vehicle is on level ground Level correct Fault and the engine has been off for at least 30 minutes. This is indicated by the flashing of "OIL_ _" or by the display of a dedicated message in the instrument panel. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
It is normal to top-up the engine oil level between services (or oil changes). Level incorrect PEUGEOT recommends that you check This is indicated by the flashing of "OIL" or the oil level and top-up if necessary, by the display of a dedicated message in the every 3 000 miles (5 000 km). instrument panel. If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using the dipstick, the level must be topped up to avoid damage to the engine.
32 Monitoring
Coolant temperature gauge 1
After driving for a few minutes, the temperature and pressure in the cooling system increase. To top up the level: F wait for the engine to cool, F unscrew the cap slightly to allow the pressure to drop, F when the pressure has dropped, remove the cap, F top up the level to the "MAX" mark.
With the engine running, when the needle is: - in zone A, the temperature is correct, - in zone B, the temperature is too high; Be aware of the risk of burns when the maximum temperature and the topping up the cooling system. Do not central STOP warning lamps come on, fill above the maximum level (indicated accompanied by an audible signal and a on the header tank). warning message in the screen. You MUST stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Wait a few minutes before switching off the engine. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
33 Monitoring Touch screen It gives access to: General operation - menus for adjusting settings for vehicle functions and systems, Recommendations Principles - audio and display configuration menus, It is necessary to press firmly, particularly for Press the "MENU" button for access to the - audio system and telephone controls and "flick" gestures (scrolling through lists, moving different menus, then press the virtual buttons the display of associated information. the map...). in the touch screen. A light wipe is not enough. Each menu is displayed over one or two pages The screen does not recognise pressing with (primary page and secondary page). more than one finger. And, depending on equipment, it allows: This technology allows use at all temperatures Use this button to go to the - the display of alert messages and the and when wearing gloves. secondary page. visual parking sensors information, Do not use pointed objects on the touch - access to the controls for the navigation screen. system and Internet services, and the Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands. Use this button to return to the display of associated information. Uses a soft clean cloth to clean the touch primary page. screen. After a few moments with no action on the secondary page, the primary page is displayed automatically. For reasons of safety, the driver State of indicator lamps should only carry out operations Some buttons contain an indicator lamp that Use this button for access to that require close attention, with the gives the state of the corresponding function. additional information and to the vehicle stationary. Green indicator: you have switched on the settings for certain functions. Some functions are not accessible corresponding function. when driving. Orange indicator: you have switched off the Use this button to confirm. corresponding function.
Use this button to quit.
34 Monitoring 1
1. Volume / mute. See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.
Menus Press this button for access to the different menus.
Navigation Radio Media Settings Depending on trim level, navigation See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section. Allows configuration of the display can be not available, an option or and the system. standard. Gives access to interactive help See the "Audio equipment and for the vehicle's main systems and telematics" section. warning lamps.
Connected services Telephone Driving These services can be not available, See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section. Allows access to the trip computer and, an option or standard. depending on version, the adjustment See the "Audio equipment and of settings for certain functions. telematics" section. See the corresponding section.
35 Monitoring
"Settings" menu
The functions available through this menu are detailed in the table below.
Button Corresponding function Comments
Audio settings Adjustment of volume, balance...
Turn off screen Turns the screen off.
Color schemes Choice of a color scheme.
Interactive help Access to the interactive user guide.
System Settings Choice of units: - temperature (°Celsius or °Fahrenheit) - distance and fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
Time/Date Setting the date and time.
Languages Choice of language used.
Screen settings Adjustment of the screen (brightness) and display settings (scrolling of text, animations...)
Calculator
Calendar
36 Monitoring
"Driving" menu 1
The functions accessible from this menu are detailed in the table below.
Button Corresponding function Comments
Vehicle settings The functions with settings that can be adjusted are grouped together under these tabs: - "Driving assistance" ● "Automatic rear wiper in reverse" (Activation of rear wiper coupled to reverse gear; see the corresponding section) - "Lighting" ● "Guide-me-home lighting" (Automatic guide me home lighting; see the corresponding section), ● "LED daytime running lamps" (see the corresponding section), ● "Mood lighting" (Interior mood lighting; see the corresponding section). Select or deselect the tabs at the bottom of the screen to display the functions required.
Speed settings Memorisation of speeds for use with the speed limiter or cruise control.
Under-inflation initialisation Initialisation of the under-inflation detection system.
37 Monitoring Trip computer System that gives you information on the current journey (range, fuel consumption…).
Instrument panel Trip reset
- The current information tab with: ● the range, ● the current fuel consumption, ● the Stop & Start time counter.
- Trip "1" with: ● the average speed, Information display ● the average fuel consumption, ● the distance travelled, for the first trip. F When the trip required is displayed, press the control for more than two seconds - Trip "2" with: or use the left hand thumb wheel of the ● the average speed, steering mounted controls. ● the average fuel consumption, Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use ● the distance travelled, is identical. for the second trip. For example, trip "1" can be used for daily figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
F Press the button on the end of the wiper control stalk to display the various tabs in succession.
38 Monitoring 1 Touch screen
Information display Trip reset
- The current fuel consumption tab with: ● the range, ● the current fuel consumption, ● the Stop & Start time counter.
- The trip "1" tab with: ● the distance travelled, ● the average fuel consumption, ● the average speed, F Press the MENU button for for the first trip. F When the desired trip is access to the different menus. displayed, press the reset button.
Trips and are independent but their use F Select the "Driving" menu to - The trip "2" tab with: "1" "2" display the various tabs. ● the distance travelled, is identical. ● the average fuel consumption, For example, trip "1" can be used for daily ● the average speed, figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures. F Select the desired tab using your finger. for the second trip.
39 Monitoring Trip computer A few definitions Range Current fuel consumption Distance travelled (miles or km) (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) (miles or km) The distance which can still be Calculated over the last few seconds. Calculated since the last trip travelled with the fuel remaining reset. in the tank (related to the average fuel consumption over the last few miles (kilometres) travelled). This function is only displayed from 20 mph (30 km/h).
This value may vary following a change in the style of driving or the relief, resulting in a significant change in the Average fuel consumption Stop & Start time current fuel consumption. (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) counter Calculated since the last trip reset. (minutes / seconds or hours / minutes) When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km), If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time dashes are displayed. After filling with at least counter calculates the time spent in STOP 5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is mode during a journey. displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km). It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the key.
If dashes are displayed continuously Average speed while driving in place of the digits, (mph or km/h) contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a Calculated since the last trip reset. qualified workshop.
40 Monitoring Distance recorders 1 Odometer Trip recorder
System that measures the total distance System that measures the distance travelled travelled by the vehicle during its life. (daily, for example) since it was last reset by The total distance is displayed in zone A of the the driver. instrument panel screen. The trip recorder is displayed in zone B of the instrument panel screen. Resetting the trip recorder
With the trip mileage displayed, press this button for a few seconds. 41 Monitoring Setting the date and time Instrument panel Touch screen Select "Adjust time" or "Adjust date".
F Each press of this button moves between the following settings: - hours, Press the MENU button for access to - minutes, the different menus. Modify the setting using the virtual - 12 or 24 hour format. keypad then press on "Confirm".
Press on "Confirm" to save the Select the "Settings" menu. modifications and quit the menu.
Display the secondary page.
In the secondary page select "Time/ Date".
42 Access Remote control key System for the central unlocking or locking Unfolding the key Unlocking the vehicle of the vehicle using the door lock or from a 2 distance. Using the key It is also used to locate and start the vehicle, as well as providing protection against theft.
F Press this button to unfold the key. F Turn the key in the driver's door lock towards the front of the vehicle to unlock it.
Using the remote control F Press the open padlock to unlock A. Unfolding / Folding. the vehicle. B. Unlocking. Disarming the alarm. C. Locking. Unlocking is confirmed by rapid Locating the vehicle. flashing of the direction indicators for Arming the alarm. approximately 2 seconds. D. Guide-me-home lighting. According to version, the door mirrors unfold at the same time. Unlocking with the key does not deactivate the alarm.
43 Access
Locking the vehicle Deadlocking
Using the key Locking is confirmed by fixed Deadlocking renders the exterior and lighting of the direction indicators for interior door controls inoperative. approximately 2 seconds. It also deactivates the manual central According to version, the door mirrors control button. fold at the same time. Therefore, never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
If one of the doors or the boot is still Using the key open or if an electronic key has been F Turn the key in the driver's door lock left inside the vehicle, the central towards the rear to lock the vehicle. locking does not take place. When the vehicle is locked, if it is unlocked inadvertently, it will lock Using the remote control itself again automatically after about 30 seconds unless a door is opened. F Press the closed padlock to lock the vehicle. When the key is in the ignition switch, its locking/unlocking functions are Maintaining the locking action (key or remote deactivated. control) automatically closes the windows. The folding and unfolding of the door F Turn the key to the rear in the driver's door mirrors by the remote control can be lock to lock the vehicle completely. As a safety measure (children on deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a F Turn the key to the rear again within board), never leave the vehicle without qualified workshop. five seconds to deadlock the vehicle. taking your key, even for a short period.
44 Access
Folding the key Locating your vehicle Using the remote control F A press switches on the vehicle's 2 lighting and flashes the direction F Press the closed padlock to lock the indicators for a few seconds to vehicle completely. help you locate your vehicle in F Press the closed padlock again within a car park. five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed lighting of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds. Guide-me-home lighting F Press this button before folding the key. Depending on version, the door mirrors fold at the same time. Make a long press on this button to operate the guide-me-home lighting If you do not press the button when (switching on the sidelamps, dipped folding the key, there is a risk of beams and number plate lamps). damage to the mechanism.
A second press before the end of the timed period cancels the guide-me-home lighting.
45 Access
Electronic engine immobiliser Remote control problem Changing the battery The original key contains a coded electronic Following disconnection of the vehicle battery, chip. When the ignition is switched on, starting replacement of the remote control battery or is only possible if the code is detected and in the event of a remote control malfunction, recognised. you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your This protection against theft locks the engine vehicle. management system a few moments after the F First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock ignition is switched off and prevents starting of or lock your vehicle. the engine following a break-in. F Then, reinitialise the remote control. If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT In the event of a fault, you are dealer as soon as possible. informed by illumination of the warning lamp, an audible signal and Battery ref.: CR1620 / 3 volts. the display of a message. In this case, your vehicle will not start; contact If the battery is flat, you are informed a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible. by lighting of this warning lamp in the instrument panel, an audible signal and a message in the screen. Advice F Unclip the cover using a screwdriver in the cutout. Keep away from your vehicle, the F Remove the cover. label attached to the keys given to you F Extract the flat battery from its location. on acquisition of the vehicle. It will F Place the new battery into its location help in finding the original code for Reinitialisation observing the original direction. replacement of the key. F Clip the cover in place. F Switch off the ignition. F Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition). F Press the closed padlock immediately for a Do not throw the remote control few seconds. batteries away, they contain metals F Switch off the ignition and remove the key which are harmful to the environment. from the ignition switch. Take them to an approved collection The remote control is fully operational again. point.
46 Access
Lost keys Go to a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's registration document, your personal identification documents and if possible the key code label. The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to look up the key code and the transponder code required to order a new key. 2
Remote control The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it. Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have to be reinitialised. No remote control can operate when the key is in the ignition switch, even when the ignition is switched off, except for reinitialisation.
Anti-theft protection Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could cause malfunctions.
Locked vehicle Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency. As a safety precaution, never leave children alone in the vehicle, except for a very short period. In all cases, it is essential to remove the key from the ignition switch when leaving the vehicle.
Second-hand vehicle Have the pairing of all of the keys in your possession checked by a PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that only your keys can be used to open and start the vehicle.
47 Access Doors Opening Closing F Push or pull the door to close it. From outside From inside
When one of the doors is not properly closed:
- with the engine running, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by the display of an alert message for a few seconds,
- when driving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of an alert message for a few seconds. F After unlocking the vehicle using the F Pull the interior control lever of a front door; remote control or the key, pull the door this unlocks the vehicle completely. handle.
The interior opening control on a rear The interior door controls do not door does not work if the child lock operate when the vehicle is deadlocked. is on. For more information on the child lock, refer to the corresponding section.
48 Access
Back-up control For mechanically locking and unlocking the Driver's door Passenger doors 2 doors in the event of a fault with the central locking system or a battery failure.
In the event of a fault with the central locking, it is essential to disconnect the battery to lock the boot and so assure the complete locking of the vehicle.
Insert the key in the lock to lock or unlock Locking the door. F On the rear doors, check that the child lock is not on. F Remove the black cap located on the edge of the door, using the key. F Insert the key into the aperture without forcing, then without turning, move the latch sideways towards the inside of the door. F Remove the key and refit the cap.
Unlocking F Pull the interior door lever.
49 Access Boot Opening Closing Tailgate release F Lower the tailgate using the interior grab System for mechanical unlocking of the boot in handle. the event of a central locking malfunction. F If necessary, press down on the tailgate to fully close it.
If the tailgate is not closed correctly: - when the engine is running, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by the display of an alert message for a few seconds, - when the vehicle is moving (speed above F After unlocking the boot or the vehicle 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes using the remote control or the key, press on, accompanied by an audible signal the opening control, then raise the tailgate. and the display of an alert message for a few seconds. Unlocking F Fold back the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside the boot. F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the lock to unlock the tailgate.
50 Access Locking / unlocking from the inside 2
F Press the button to lock (the indicator lamp If one of the doors is open, the doors Automatic central locking of the in the button comes on) or unlock (the are not locked. doors indicator lamp in the button goes off) the The doors can lock automatically while driving doors and boot from inside. (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). To turn this function on or off (on by default). When one of the doors is not properly closed: When locking / deadlocking from F press and hold the button until there is - with the engine running, outside an audible signal and/or a message in this warning lamp comes on, When the vehicle is locked or the screen. accompanied by the display of an deadlocked from outside, the switch alert message for a few seconds, does not operate. - when driving (speed above 6 mph F After normal locking, pull the (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, interior door lever to unlock accompanied by an audible signal and the vehicle. Driving with the doors locked may make the display of an alert message for a F After deadlocking, you have to use access to the passenger compartment few seconds. the remote control or the key to by the emergency services more unlock the vehicle. difficult in an emergency.
51 Access Alarm After the locking button on the remote control Self-protection function is pressed, the exterior perimeter monitoring The system checks for the putting out of is activated after a delay of 5 seconds and the service of its components. interior volumetric monitoring after a delay of The alarm is triggered if the battery, the 45 seconds. central control or the wires of the siren If an opening (door, boot...) is not closed are put out of service or damaged. fully, the vehicle is not locked but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be activated after a For all work on the alarm system, delay of 45 seconds at the same time as the contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a interior volumetric monitoring. qualified workshop.
System which protects and provides a deterrent against theft and break-ins. It provides the following types of monitoring: Locking the vehicle with full alarm system - Exterior perimeter Activation Deactivation The system checks for opening of the vehicle. F Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle. The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a F Press the locking button on the F Press the unlocking button on door, the boot, the bonnet... remote control. the remote control.
- Interior volumetric The system checks for any variation in the The monitoring system is active: the The alarm system is deactivated: the volume in the passenger compartment. indicator lamp in the button flashes indicator lamp in the button goes off. The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a once per second. window, enters the passenger compartment or moves inside the vehicle.
52 Access
Locking the vehicle Reactivating the interior Remote control fault volumetric monitoring with exterior perimeter To deactivate the monitoring functions: 2 monitoring only F Press the unlocking button on F Unlock the vehicle using the key in the the remote control to deactivate Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring driver's door lock. the exterior perimeter monitoring. F to avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in Open the door; the alarm is triggered. F certain cases such as: Switch on the ignition; the alarm stops. The indicator lamp in the button goes off. - leaving a pet in the vehicle, F Press the locking button on the - leaving a window partially open, remote control to activate all the Locking the vehicle without - washing your vehicle. monitoring functions. activating the alarm F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key Deactivating the interior The indicator lamp in the button in the driver's door lock. volumetric monitoring again flashes once per second. F Switch off the ignition. Malfunction F Within 10 seconds, press the When the ignition is switched on, fixed button until the indicator lamp is Triggering of the alarm illumination of the indicator lamp in the button on continuously. This is indicated by sounding of the siren indicates a malfunction of the system. F Get out of the vehicle. and flashing of the direction indicators for Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a F Press the locking button on the 30 seconds. qualified workshop. remote control immediately. The monitoring functions remain active until the alarm has been triggered eleven times in Automatic activation* succession. The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is 2 minutes after the last door or the boot is activated: the indicator lamp in the button When the vehicle is unlocked using closed, the system is activated automatically. flashes once per second. the remote control, rapid flashing F To avoid triggering the alarm on entering of the indicator lamp in the button the vehicle, first press the unlocking button To be effective, this deactivation must informs you that the alarm was on the remote control. be carried out each time the ignition is triggered during your absence. When the switched off. ignition is switched on, this flashing stops immediately. * Depending on the country of sale. 53 Access Electric windows Manual operation Safety anti-pinch To open or close the window, press or pull the (depending on version) switch gently. The window stops as soon as the When the window rises and meets an obstacle, switch is released. it stops and immediately partially lowers again. In the event of unwanted opening of the window when closing automatically, press the switch until the window opens completely, then pull Automatic one-touch the switch immediately until the window closes. operation Continue to hold the switch for approximately one second after the window has closed. (depending on version) The safety anti-pinch function is not active 1. Left hand front electric window. To open or close the window, press or pull during this operation. 2. Right hand front electric window. the switch fully: the window opens or closes 3. Right hand rear electric window. completely when the switch is released. 4. Left hand rear electric window. Pressing the switch again stops the movement 5. Deactivating the rear electric window of the window. switches. The electric window switches remain operational for approximately one minute after Deactivating the rear the key has been removed. Once this time has elapsed, the electric window controls windows will not operate. To reactivate them, switch the ignition on again. For the safety of your children, press switch 5 to prevent operation of the windows of the rear doors, irrespective of their position.
With the warning lamp on, the rear switches are deactivated. With the warning lamp off, the switches are active.
54 Access
Reinitialising the electric windows 2 Following reconnection of the battery, the Always remove the key when leaving the safety anti-pinch function must be reinitialised. vehicle, even for a short time. The safety anti-pinch is not active during these In the event of contact during operation operations: of the windows, you must reverse the - lower the window completely, then raise movement of the window. To do this, it, it will rise in steps of a few centimetres press the switch concerned. each time the switch is pressed. Repeat When operating the passenger electric the operation until the window closes window switches, the driver must ensure completely, that no one is preventing correct closing - press and hold the switch upwards for of the windows. at least one second after reaching this The driver must ensure that the position, window closed. passengers use the electric windows correctly. Be aware of children when operating the windows.
55 Comfort Front seats As a safety measure, seat adjustments should only be carried out when stationary.
Forwards-backwards Height Backrest
F Raise the control and slide the seat F Pull the control upwards to raise or push F Push the control rearwards. forwards or backwards. it downwards to lower, as many times as required, to obtain the position required.
Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is nothing that might prevent the full travel of the seat, so as to avoid the risk of jamming the seat caused by the presence of objects on the floor behind the seat or rear passengers. If the seat jams, stop the movement immediately.
56 Comfort
Head restraints 3
F To raise the head restraint, pull it upwards. The head restraint has a frame with F To remove the head restraint, press the notches which prevent it from lowering; lug and pull the head restraint upwards. A this is a safety device in case of impact. F To put the head restraint back in place, The adjustment is correct when the engage the head restraint stems in the upper edge of the head restraint is openings, keeping them in line with the level with the top of the head. seat back. Never drive with the head restraints F To lower the head restraint, press the lug A removed; they must be in place and and the head restraint at the same time. adjusted correctly.
57 Comfort Rear seats Bench seat with fixed one-piece cushion and split backrest (left hand 2/3, right hand 1/3) which can be folded individually to adapt the load space in the boot. Folding the backrest Repositioning the seat backrest
F Move the corresponding front seat forward F Press control 1 to release the seat F Straighten the seat backrest 2 and if necessary. backrest 2. secure it. F Check that the corresponding outer seat F Fold the seat backrest 2 on to the F Check that the red indicator, located next to belt is positioned correctly against the cushion 3. the control 1, is no longer visible. backrest and buckle it. F Unbuckle and reposition the outer seat belt F Place the head restraints in the low on the side of the backrest. position.
When folding the seat, the centre seat The seat backrest alone can be folded When repositioning the seat backrest, belt should not be fastened, but laid out to increase the boot loading space. The take care not to trap the seat belts. flat on the seat. rear seat cushion does not fold.
58 Comfort Steering wheel adjustment Head restraints PEUGEOT i-Cockpit 3
These have one position for use (up) and a F When stationary, pull the control lever to Before taking to the road and to make the most stowed position (down). release the adjustment mechanism. of the special ergonomics of the PEUGEOT They can be removed and are interchangeable F Adjust the height and reach to suit your i-Cockpit, carry out these adjustments in the side to side. driving position. following order: To remove a head restraint: F Push the control lever to lock the - height of the head restraint, F pull the head restraint fully up, adjustment mechanism. - backrest angle, F then, press the lug A. - cushion height, - longitudinal position of the seat, - reach and then height of the steering wheel, - the interior and door mirrors.
Never drive with the head restraints As a safety measure, these operations Once these adjustments have been made, removed; they must be in place and should only be carried out with the ensure that you can see the "head-up" instrument correctly adjusted. vehicle stationary. panel clearly from your driving position, over the reduced diameter steering wheel.
59 Comfort Mirrors Door mirrors Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass Folding providing the lateral rearward vision necessary - Automatic: lock the vehicle using the for overtaking or parking. They can also be remote control or the key. folded for parking in confined spaces. - Manual: with the ignition on, pull control A rearwards.
If the mirrors are folded using control A, As a safety measure, the mirrors should they will not unfold when the vehicle is be adjusted to reduce the "blind spots". unlocked. Pull again on control A.
Demisting - Defrosting Adjustment Unfolding Demisting-defrosting of the door F Move control A to the right or to the left to - Automatic: unlock the vehicle using the mirrors operates with the engine select the corresponding mirror. remote control or the key. running, by switching on the heated F Move control B in all four directions to - Manual: with the ignition on, pull control A rear screen. adjust. rearwards. F Return control A to the central position. For more information on demisting and The folding and unfolding of the door defrosting the rear screen, refer to the mirrors using the remote control can be corresponding section. deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Fold the mirrors when putting your The objects observed are, in reality, vehicle through an automatic car wash. closer than they appear. Take this into account when assessing the distance of vehicles approaching If necessary, it is possible to fold the from behind. mirrors manually.
60 Comfort
Rear view mirror Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass and reduces the nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, headlamps from other vehicles...
Manual model Automatic "electrochrome" 3 model
Adjustment This system automatically and progressively F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is changes between the day and night uses by directed correctly in the "day" position. means of a sensor, which measures the light from the rear of the vehicle. Day / night position F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti- dazzle position. F Push the lever to change to the normal In order to ensure optimum visibility "day" position. during your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens automatically when reverse gear is engaged.
61 Comfort Ventilation Air intake The air circulating in the passenger compartment is filtered and originates either from the outside via the grille located at the base of the windscreen or from the inside in air recirculation mode.
Air intake flow The incoming air follows various paths depending on the controls selected by the driver: - direct arrival in the passenger compartment (air intake), - passage through a heating circuit (heating), - passage through a cooling circuit (air conditioning).
Control panel The controls of this system are grouped together on control panel A on the centre console. Air distribution 1. Windscreen demisting-defrosting vents. 4. Central adjustable air vents. 2. Front side window demisting-defrosting 5. Air outlets to the front footwells. vents. 6. Air outlets to the rear footwells. 3. Side adjustable air vents.
62 Comfort Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning
In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance If after an extended stop in sunshine, guidelines below: the interior temperature is very high, first F To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles ventilate the passenger compartment for located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well a few moments. as the air extractor located in the boot. Put the air flow control at a setting high 3 F Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for regulation enough to quickly change the air in the of the air conditioning system. passenger compartment. F Operate the air conditioning system for at least 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month The air conditioning system does not to keep it in perfect working order. contain chlorine and does not present F Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter any danger to the ozone layer. elements replaced regularly. We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its special active additive, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the The condensation created by the air occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic conditioning results in a discharge symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits). of water under the vehicle which is F To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have perfectly normal. it checked regularly as recommended in the warranty and maintenance record. F If the system does not produce cold air, switch it off and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. When towing the maximum load on a steep gradient in high temperatures, switching off the air conditioning increases the available engine power and so improves the towing ability.
Stop & Start The heating and air conditioning systems only work when the engine is running. To maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment, you can temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start system. For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the corresponding section.
63 Comfort
Suggested interior settings
Heating or Manual air conditioning
I require... Recirculation of interior air / Air distribution Air flow Temperature Manual AC Intake of exterior air
HOT
COLD
DEMISTING DEFROSTING
Digital air conditioning: use the automatic mode in preference by pressing the "AUTO" button.
64 Comfort Heating / Ventilation Manual air conditioning Manual mode 3
1. Temperature adjustment. Temperature Air flow 2. Air flow adjustment. 3. Air distribution adjustment. F Turn the knob from blue F Turn the knob from position 1 to 4. Air intake/ air recirculation. (cold) to red (hot) to adjust the position 6, to obtain the desired 5. Air conditioning On / Off. temperature to your wishes. air flow.
If you place the air flow control at position 0 (off), the temperature in the vehicle will no longer be maintained. However, a slight flow of air can still be felt due to the movement of the vehicle.
65 Comfort
Air distribution Air intake / Air recirculation Air conditioning On / Off Recirculation of the air in the vehicle isolates Windscreen and side windows. the passenger compartment from exterior The air conditioning is designed to odours and fumes. operate effectively in all seasons, Return to the intake of exterior air as soon as with the windows closed. possible to avoid the risk of deterioration of air It enables you to: Windscreen, side windows and quality and misting. footwells. - lower the temperature, in summer, - increase the effectiveness of the demisting in winter, above 3 °C. F Press the button to recirculate Footwells. the interior air: the indicator lamp Switching on is on. F Press the "A/C" button, the button's indicator lamp comes on. F Press the button again to allow the intake Centre and side air vents. of exterior air: the indicator lamp is off. The air conditioning does not operate when the air flow adjustment control is in position "0".
The air distribution can be To obtain cooled air more quickly, you can use modulated by placing the knob at an recirculation of interior air for a few moments. intermediate position. Then return to fresh air intake.
Switching off F Press the "A/C" button again, the button's indicator lamp goes off. Switching off may affect comfort levels (humidity, condensation).
66 Comfort Dual-zone digital air conditioning AUTO mode When the engine is cold, the air flow will only reach its optimum level gradually to prevent too great a distribution of cold air. 3 In cold weather, it favours the distribution of warm air to the windscreen, the side windows and the footwells only.
Provides soft and quiet operation by limiting air flow. 1. Automatic comfort programme. Automatic programme 2. Temperature adjustment on driver's side. Three modes allow the driver and front 3. Temperature adjustment on passenger's side. passenger to adjust the system to suit their Offers the best compromise between individual requirements. 4. Automatic visibility programme. a comfortable temperature and quiet 5. Air conditioning On/Off. operation. 6. Air distribution adjustment. Switching on Provides strong and effective air flow. 7. Air flow adjustment. 8. Air intake/ Air recirculation. F Press the "AUTO" button repeatedly. The indicator lamp comes on at the first press; the mode activated appears in the Switching off digital air conditioning screen: F Press the "empty fan" air flow button until the fan symbol disappears.
67 Comfort
Auto - Visibility programme Air conditioning Switching on Temperature The air conditioning is designed to operate F Press the "visibility" button for efficiently in all seasons, with the windows Adjustment faster demisting or defrosting closed. of the windscreen and side It allows you: The driver and front passenger can each set windows. - in summer, to lower the temperature, the temperature to suit their requirements. The system automatically manages the air - in winter, above 3 °C, to improve demisting. The value indicated in the screen corresponds conditioning, and the air intake, flow and to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in distribution to the windscreen and side degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit. Switching on windows to the best effect. F Press the "A/C" button, the Switching off F Push the button down (blue) to associated indicator lamp comes F Press the button reduce the value or up (red) to "visibility" on. again or the "AUTO" button, the increase it. The air conditioning cannot operate when the indicator lamp in the button goes air flow is set to off. off and the indicator lamp in the "AUTO" button comes on. A setting around 21 enables you to obtain an optimum level of comfort. Depending on your Switching off requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is usual. The system reverts to the previous settings In addition, it is recommended that you avoid a left/ used. F Press the "A/C" button again; the right setting difference of more than 3. associated indicator lamp goes F Press the "AUTO" button again off. On entering the vehicle, if the interior to return to the automatic comfort temperature is much colder or warmer programme. than the comfort value, there is no need For maximum cooling or heating of to alter the value displayed in order to the passenger compartment, you can obtain the required level of comfort. exceed the minimum value of 14 or The system corrects the temperature Switching off may cause some the maximum value of 28. difference automatically and as quickly problems (humidity, misting). F Push the button down until "LO" as possible. is displayed or up until "HI" is displayed. 68 Comfort
Air distribution Air intake/Air recirculation Manual mode F Press this button several times in Switching on Depending on your requirements, you can succession to direct the air flow make a different selection from that offered by in turn towards: F Press this button to recirculate the system by changing a setting. The other - the windscreen, the side the interior air. The indicator functions will still be controlled automatically. windows and the footwells, lamp in the button comes on and When you modify a setting, the indicator lamp - the windscreen and side the air recirculation symbol is 3 in the "AUTO" button goes off. windows (demisting or displayed. defrosting), Air recirculation prevents exterior odours - the central and side vents, and fumes from entering the passenger - the central vents, the side Switching the system off compartment. It is activated automatically when vents and the footwells, operating the screenwash. - the footwells. F Press the "empty fan" air flow button until the fan symbol Switching off disappears and "---" appears.
F As soon as possible, press this button again to permit the intake of exterior air and This action switches off all of the functions of the prevent misting. The indicator lamp in the air conditioning system. button goes off. The temperature is no longer maintained at a Air flow comfortable level. However, a slight flow of air, due to the movement of the vehicle, can still be felt. F Press this "full fan" button to Avoid prolonged operation in interior air increase the air flow. recirculation mode (risk of misting and Avoid driving for too long with the of deterioration of the air quality). system switched off (risk of misting and The air flow symbol (a fan) appears in the of deterioration of the air quality). screen. It is filled in progressively in relation to the value required. Pressing the "full fan" button F Press this button to "empty fan" reactivates the system with the reduce the air flow. settings prior to deactivation.
69 Comfort Front demist - defrost Rear screen These markings on the control panel indicate the control positions for rapid demisting or defrosting of the windscreen and side windows. demist - defrost Manual air conditioning Dual-zone digital air The control button is located on the conditioning air conditioning system control panel. Switching on Auto - Visibility programme Switching on F Put the air flow, temperature and Switching on The rear screen demisting/defrosting can only distribution controls to the dedicated F operate when the engine is running. marked position. Press the "visibility" button to demist or defrost the windscreen F Press this button to demist/defrost the and side windows as quickly as rear screen and (depending on version) the door mirrors. The indicator lamp F Press the "A/C" button for air possible. conditioning; the indicator lamp in associated with the button comes on. the button comes on. The system automatically manages the air conditioning, air flow and air intake, and Switching off provides optimum distribution towards the The demisting/defrosting switches off automatically Switching off windscreen and side windows. to prevent an excessive consumption of current. F It is possible to stop the demisting/defrosting F Press the "A/C" button again; Switching off operation before it is switched off automatically the indicator lamp in the button by pressing the button again. The indicator goes off. F Press the "visibility" button lamp associated with the button goes off. again or on "AUTO"; the indicator lamp in the button goes off and F Switch off the demisting/defrosting the indicator lamp in the "AUTO" button comes on. of the rear screen and door mirrors as soon as appropriate, as lower With Stop & Start, when demisting has current consumption results in been activated, the STOP mode is not The system reverts to the previous settings. reduced fuel consumption. available.
70 Fittings Interior fittings
1. Glove box (see details on the following page) 2. Open storage compartment (depending on version) 3. 12 V accessory socket (120 W) Observe the maximum power rating to 4 avoid damaging your accessory. (see details on the following page) 4. USB port / Auxiliary socket (see details on following pages) 5. Open storage compartments 6. Cup holder 7. Closed storage compartment or armrest (depending on version) (see details on following pages) 8. Door pockets
71 Fittings
Glove box 12 V socket Front armrest
Its lid has locations for a pair of glasses... F To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum (depending on version) F To open the glove box, raise the handle. power: 120 Watts), lift the cover and The armrest can be inclined forward for your It houses the front passenger's airbag connect a suitable adaptor. comfort or folded fully back. deactivation switch A.
Do not exceed the maximum power rating of the socket (otherwise there is a risk of damaging your portable device).
If the vehicle is fitted with air conditioning, it The connection of an electrical device provides access to the ventilation nozzle B, not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a distributing the same conditioned air as the USB charger, may adversely affect the vents in the passenger compartment. operation of vehicle electrical systems, causing faults such as poor telephone It gives access to the fusebox (for more reception or interference with displays information on changing a fuse, refer to in the screens. the corresponding section).
72 Fittings
USB port / Jack auxiliary socket
4
This connection box, consisting of an USB port When the USB port is used, the portable device and a JACK auxiliary socket is located on the charges automatically. centre console. While charging, a message is displayed if the It allows the connection of portable device, current drawn by the portable device exceeds such as a digital audio player of the iPod® type the power rating of the vehicle's port. or a USB memory stick. It reads the audio files which are transmitted to your audio system and played via the vehicle's speakers. For more information on the use of this You can manage these files using the steering system, refer to the "Audio equipment mounted controls or the audio system control and telematics" section. panel and display them in the instrument panel screen.
73 Fittings
Mats Removable carpet protection.
Removal Refitting To refit the mat on the driver's side: F position the mat correctly, F refit the fixings by pressing, F check that the mat is secured correctly.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - only use mats which are suited to To remove the mat on the driver's side: the fixings already present in the F move the seat as far back as possible, vehicle; these fixings must be used, F unclip the fixings, - never fit one mat on top of another. F remove the mat. The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT may interfere with access to the pedals and hinder the operation of the cruise control / speed limiter.
74 Fittings Boot fittings 1. High load retaining net (depending on version) (see following page for details) 2. Luggage cover (see following page for details) 3. Boot lamp 4. Retaining strap 5. Stowing rings (depending on version) 4 6. Retaining net
75 Fittings
High load retaining net
To use it in row 1: To use it in row 2: F open the covers of the upper fixings 1, F fold or remove the load space cover, F unroll the high load retaining net, F open the covers of the upper fixings 2, F position one of the ends of the net's metal F unroll the high load retaining net, bar in the corresponding upper fixing 1, F position one of the ends of the net's metal then do the same with the other end, bar in the corresponding upper fixing 2, F slacken the straps fully, then do the same with the other end, Hooked onto the upper fixings and onto the F fix the snap hook of each of the straps on F attach the hook of each of the net's straps lower rings or the lugs, this permits use of the the corresponding lug 3, located under the in the corresponding lower ring 4, entire loading volume up to the roof: bench seat cushion, F tighten the straps, - behind the rear seats (row 2), F fold the rear seats, F check that the net is hooked and tightened - behind the front seats (row 1) when the rear F tighten the straps without raising the correctly. seats are folded. bench seat, F check that the net is hooked and tightened When positioning the net, check that correctly. the strap loops are visible from the boot; this will make slackening or Never use the ISOFIX ring intended for tightening easier. fixing the upper strap of child seat to the Top Tether.
76 Fittings
Rear parcel shelf
4
This consists of two sections which can be To gain access to the boot from the rear seats: folded back on each other. F raise the front section of the rear parcel To store it, fold it on itself and place it at the shelf using the grip A. bottom of the boot.
77 Fittings
Warning triangle (stowing) The location for stowing a folded triangle or its box is under the front seat or under the boot carpet (depending on version).
Before leaving your vehicle to set up Placing the triangle in the road The triangle is available as an and install the triangle, switch on the F Place the triangle at a distance behind the accessory, contact a PEUGEOT dealer hazard warning lamps and put on your vehicle, in line with the driving regulations or a qualified workshop. high visibility vest. in force in the country.
The dimensions of the triangle (once folded) or its storage box must be: - A: length = 438 mm, - B: height = 56 mm, - C: width = 38 mm.
To use the triangle, refer to the manufacturer's instructions.
78 Driving Driving recommendations Observe the driving regulations and remain If you are obliged to drive through water: Important! vigilant whatever the traffic conditions. Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your hands on the wheel so that you are ready to Never drive with the parking brake react at any time to any eventuality. applied - Risk of overheating and On a long journey, a break every two hours is damage to the braking system! strongly recommended. Risk of fire! In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate As the exhaust system of your vehicle the need to brake and increase the distance is very hot, even several minutes after from other vehicles. switching off the engine, do not park or run the engine over areas where 5 inflammable substances and materials - check that the depth of water does not are present: grass, leaves, etc... exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that might be generated by other users, Driving on flooded roads - deactivate the Stop & Start system, - drive as slowly as possible without stalling. In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph We strongly advise against driving on flooded Never leave a vehicle unsupervised (10 km/h), roads, as this could cause serious damage with the engine running. If you have - do not stop and do not switch off the to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the to leave your vehicle with the engine engine. electrical systems of your vehicle. running, apply the parking brake and put the gearbox into neutral or position N or P, depending on the type On leaving the flooded road, as soon as of gearbox. circumstances allow, make several light brake applications to dry the brake discs and pads. If in doubt on the state of your vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
79 Driving Starting - Switching off the engine Ignition switch Starting
With a manual gearbox, place the gear selector in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal. 1.p Sto position. 2. Ignition on position. F 3. Starting position. Insert the key in the ignition switch. The system recognises the starting code. F Release the steering column by simultaneously turning the wheel and the key. With an electronic gearbox, place the gear selector at N then press the brake pedal firmly. In some cases, you may have to apply some force to turn the steering (if the wheels are on lock against a kerb, for Avoid attaching heavy objects to the example). key or the remote control, which would weigh down on its blade in the ignition switch and could cause a malfunction. It could adversely affect the deployment F Turn the key fully towards the dashboard to With an automatic gearbox, place the gear of the front airbag. position 3 (Starting). selector at P or N then press the brake pedal F When the engine starts, release the key. firmly.
80 Driving
Switching off
F Immobilise the vehicle. F Turn the key fully towards you to Free-wheeling Key left in the "Ignition on" position 1 (Stop). For safety reasons, do not free-wheel. position F Remove the key from the ignition switch. Otherwise, some vehicle functions will If the key has been left in the ignition F To lock the steering column, turn the wheel no longer be active. switch at position 2 (Ignition on), until the lock engages. the ignition will be switched off automatically after one hour. To switch the ignition back on, turn the key to position 1 (Stop), then back to 5 To facilitate unlocking of the steering Switching off the engine leads to a loss position 2 (Ignition on). wheel, it is recommended that you of braking assistance. place the wheels in the straight ahead position before switching off the engine.
81 Driving Manual parking brake Application Release
F F , pull the Pull the parking brake lever up to With the foot brake applied When parking on a slope, direct your parking brake lever up gently, press the immobilise your vehicle. wheels against the kerb, apply the trigger, then lower the lever fully. parking brake, engage a gear and switch off the ignition. When the vehicle is being driven, On level ground, it is not necessary to if this warning lamp and the STOP make a maximum pull on the parking warning lamp come on, accompanied brake lever. by an audible signal and a message in the screen, this indicates that the parking brake is still on or has not been fully released.
82 Driving 5-speed manual 6-speed manual gearbox gearbox Engaging reverse gear Engaging 5th or 6th gear Engaging reverse gear F Move the gear selector fully to the right to engage 5th or 6th gear. 5 Failure to observe this procedure may cause permanent damage to the gearbox (engaging 3rd or 4th gear by mistake).
F Push the gear selector to the right then F Raise the ring under the knob and move backwards. the gear selector to the left then forwards.
Only engage reverse gear when the Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle. vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine: starting of the engine: - always select neutral, - always select neutral, - press the clutch pedal. - press the clutch pedal.
83 Driving 5-speed electronic gearbox 5-speed electronically controlled gearbox Gear selector Steering mounted controls which offers a choice between the ease of automatic operation or the pleasure of manual gear changing. Three driving modes are offered: - automated mode for automatic control of the gears by the gearbox, without any action by the driver. - manual mode for sequential changing of the gears by the driver, using the gear selector or the steering mounted control paddles. +. Change up paddle. - auto sequential mode for overtaking, for F Press the back of the steering wheel "+" example, remaining in the automated mode R. Reverse paddle to change up a gear. while using the functions of the sequential F With your foot on the brake, move the -. Change down paddle. mode. selector forwards to select this position. F Press the back of the steering wheel "-" N. Neutral. paddle to change down a gear. F With your foot on the brake, select this position to start the engine. A. Automated mode. Do not drive with your hand resting on F Move the selector backwards to select this the gear selector, as there is a risk of mode. damaging the gearbox. The steering mounted paddles do not M. + / - M anual mode with sequential gear permit the selection of neutral or the changing. engaging and disengaging of reverse F Move the selector backwards, then to the gear. left to select this mode, then: - push forwards to change up a gear, - or push backwards to change down a gear.
84 Driving
Display in the instrument panel Moving off Manual mode F To start the engine, place the selector at F After starting the vehicle, select position M position N. to change to manual mode. F Press the brake pedal fully. F Start the engine. AUTO disappears and the gears engaged appear in succession in the If the engine does not start: instrument panel. - if N is flashing in the The gear change commands are only carried instrument panel, move out if the engine speed permits. the selector to position A, When driving at low speed, on approaching then to position N, 5 Gear selector positions - if the "Foot on the brake" warning a stop sign or traffic lights for example, N. Neutral is flashing in the instrument panel, the gearbox changes down to first gear R. Reverse press the brake pedal firmly. automatically. 1 2 3 4 5. Gears in manual mode F Select a mode (position M or A) or reverse AUTO. This comes on when the automated Automated mode (position R) mode is selected. It switches off on F Following use of the sequential mode, F Release the parking brake. changing to manual mode. select position A to return to the automated F Progressively take your foot off the brake mode. pedal, then move off. F Place your foot on the brake and the gear engaged appear AUTO and 1 or R appear in the AUTO when this warning lamp flashes instrument panel. in the instrument panel. (e.g.: starting the engine). The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive There is an audible signal on Stopping - Moving off on a slope mode, without any action on the part of the engagement of reverse. When stopping on a slope, do not use the driver. It continuously selects the most suitable accelerator to immobilise the vehicle; apply the gear for: parking brake. - optimisation of fuel consumption, - the driving style, When moving off on a slope, accelerate - the road conditions, gradually while releasing the parking - the vehicle load. brake. 85 Driving
For best acceleration, when overtaking Stopping the vehicle Operating fault another vehicle for example, press the Before switching off the engine, you can accelerator pedal firmly to pass the change to position N to be in neutral. With the ignition on, if this point of resistance. In this case, you must apply the parking warning lamp comes on and brake to immobilise the vehicle. AUTO flashes, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen, this indicates a gearbox fault. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a "Auto sequential" mode Reinitialisation qualified workshop. In the automated mode, you can resume Following disconnection of the battery, the control temporarily at any time using the gearbox must be reinitialised. steering mounted control paddles. F Switch on the ignition. You must press the brake pedal firmly The use of these paddles permits manual while starting the engine. Never select neutral N while the vehicle selection of the gears in situations which AUTO and - appear in the instrument is moving. require a more rapid change-down than in panel. the automated mode (arrival at a roundabout, Only engage reverse gear R when the leaving a car park with a steep gradient, vehicle is immobilised, with your foot on F Select position N. overtaking...). the brake pedal. F Press the brake pedal. The gearbox engages the required gear if In all cases, you must apply the parking F Wait approximately 30 seconds until N or a the engine speed permits. AUTO remains brake to immobilise the vehicle. gear appears in the instrument panel. displayed on the instrument panel. F Release the brake pedal. After a few moments, the gearbox resumes The gearbox is operational again. automatic control of the gears.
86 Driving 6-speed electronic gearbox 6-speed electronically controlled gearbox Gear selector Steering mounted control paddles which offers a choice between the ease of fully automatic operation or the pleasure of manual gear changing. There are two driving modes: - automated mode for automatic control of the gears by the gearbox, - manual mode for sequential gear changing by the driver. In automated mode, it remains possible to change gear manually by using the steering 5 mounted control paddles when required, when overtaking, for example. R. Reverse +. Change up paddle. F With your foot on the brake, lift the selector F Press the back of the "+" steering mounted and push forwards. paddle to change up a gear. N. Neutral. -. Change down paddle. F With your foot on the brake, select this F Press the back of the "-" steering mounted position to start. paddle to change down a gear. Do not drive with your hand resting on A. Automated mode. the gear selector as there is a risk of F Move the selector backwards to select this damaging the gearbox. mode. M. + / -. M anual mode with sequential gear changing. The steering mounted paddles cannot F Move the selector to the left to select this be used to select neutral, or to engage mode, then: or disengage reverse gear. - push it forwards to change up, - or pull it backwards to change down.
87 Driving
Display in the instrument panel Moving off Automated mode F To start the engine, place the selector at F After starting the vehicle, select position A position N. for enter automated mode. F Press the brake pedal down fully. F Start the engine. AUTO and the gear engaged appear in the instrument panel screen. If the engine does not start: - if N is flashing in the instrument panel, move The gearbox is then operating in auto-active the selector to position A, mode, without any action on the part of the Gear selector positions then to position N, driver. It continuously selects the most suitable gear, depending on the: N. Neutral - if the message "Foot on the - style of driving, R. Reverse brake" is displayed, press the - profile of the road. 1 2 3 4 5 6. Gears in manual mode brake pedal firmly. AUTO. This comes on when the automated mode is selected. It switches off on changing to manual mode. F Select a mode (position - automated A For optimum acceleration, for example or - manual) or reverse (position ). M R when overtaking another vehicle, press F Place your F Release the parking brake. foot on the brake the accelerator pedal firmly past the when this warning lamp is F Take your foot off the brake pedal, then point of resistance. flashing (for example, when accelerate. starting the engine).
AUTO and 1, 1 or R appears in the instrument panel screen.
Engagement of reverse gear is accompanied by an audible signal.
88 Driving
Manual gear changing Manual mode
F When the vehicle has moved off, select At very low speed, if reverse gear position to change to manual mode. M is requested, this will only be taken F Pull the selector towards the sign to + into account when the vehicle is change up a gear. immobilised. A warning lamp appears in F Push the selector towards the sign to - the instrument panel screen. change down a gear. 5 The gears engaged appear This selective gear change mode enables you successively in the instrument panel On sharp acceleration, the gearbox will to overtake, for example, while still remaining in screen. not change up unless the driver acts on automatic mode. the gear lever or the steering mounted paddles. F Operate the + or - steering mounted control The gear change requests are only carried out Never select neutral while the vehicle paddle. if the engine speed permits. N is moving. The gearbox engages the gear requested if the It is not necessary to release the accelerator Only engage reverse gear when the engine speed permits. AUTO is still displayed during gear changes. R vehicle is immobilised with the brake in the instrument panel. When braking or slowing down, the gearbox pedal pressed. After a few moments without any action on changes down automatically to permit the controls, the gearbox resumes automatic acceleration in the correct gear. control of the gears.
89 Driving
Stopping the vehicle Operating fault
Before switching off the engine, you can With the ignition on, the flashing choose to: of this warning lamp and the - move to position N to engage neutral, flashing of AUTO, accompanied - leave the gear engaged; in this case, it will by an audible signal and a message in not be possible to move the vehicle. the instrument panel screen, indicates a In both cases, you must apply the parking malfunction of the gearbox. brake to immobilise the vehicle. Have it checked by PEUGEOT or a qualified workshop.
When immobilising the vehicle, with You must press the brake pedal firmly the engine running, you must place the when starting the engine. gear selector at neutral N. Whatever the circumstances, you must Before carrying out any work in the manually apply the parking brake to engine compartment, check that the immobilise the vehicle. gear selector is at neutral N and that the parking brake is applied.
90 Driving Automatic gearbox 4-speed automatic gearbox which offers a Gear selector positions Displays in the instrument panel choice between the ease of fully automatic operation, enhanced by sport and snow programmes, or manual gear changing. Two driving modes are available: - automatic operation with electronic management of the gears by the gearbox, with a sport programme for a more dynamic style of driving and a snow programme to make driving easier when grip is poor. 5 - manual operation for sequential changing of the gears by the driver. P. Park. - Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake on or off. When you move the selector in the gate to - Starting the engine. select a position, the corresponding indicator is displayed in the instrument panel. R. Reverse. Gear selection gate - Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle stationary, P. Park engine at idle. R. Reverse Neutral N. Neutral. N. - Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake D. Drive (Automatic driving) on. S. Sport programme T - Starting the engine. . Snow programme G ears engaged during manual D. Automatic operation. 1 2 3 4. operation M + / -. M anual operation with sequential changing of the 4 gears. -. Invalid value during manual operation F Push forwards to change up through the gears. or 1. Gear selector knob. F Pull backwards to change down through 2. Button "S" (sport). the gears. 3. Button "T" (snow). 91 Driving
Moving off Automatic operation F With your foot on the brake, select position P or N. F Select position for changing When the engine is running at idle, D automatic of the 4 gears. with the brakes released, if position R, F Start the engine. The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive D or M is selected, the vehicle moves If this procedure is not followed, there is an mode, without any intervention on the part even without the accelerator being audible signal, accompanied by the display of of the driver. It continuously selects the most pressed. an warning message. suitable gear according to the style of driving, When the engine is running, never F With the engine running, press the brake the profile of the road and the load in the leave children in the vehicle without pedal. vehicle. supervision. F Release the parking brake. For maximum acceleration without touching When carrying out maintenance with F Select position R, D or M. the selector, press the accelerator pedal down the engine running, apply the parking F Gradually release the brake pedal. fully (kick down). The gearbox changes down brake and select position P. The vehicle then moves off. automatically or maintains the gear selected until the maximum engine speed is reached. On braking, the gearbox changes down automatically to provide efficient engine If position N is selected inadvertently braking. while driving, allow the engine to If you release the accelerator sharply, the return to idle then select position D to gearbox will not change to a higher gear for accelerate. safety reasons.
If the ambient temperature is below -23°C, the engine should be left at idle for 4 minutes, to ensure the Never select position N while the correct operation and life of the engine vehicle is moving. and gearbox. Never select positions P or R unless the vehicle is completely stationary.
92 Driving
Sport and snow Return to standard Manual operation programmes automatic operation These two special programmes supplement the F At any time, press the button selected F Select position M for sequential changing automatic operation in very specific conditions again to quit the programme engaged and of the four gears. of use. return to auto-adaptive mode. F Push the selector towards the + sign to change up a gear. Sport programme "S" F Pull the selector towards the - sign to F Press button "S", after starting the engine. change down a gear. The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic It is only possible to change from one gear to style of driving. another if the vehicle speed and engine speed 5 permit; otherwise, the gearbox will operate S appears in the instrument panel. temporarily in automatic mode.
D disappears and the gears T engaged appear in succession in the Snow programme " " instrument panel. F Press button "T", after starting the engine. If the engine speed is too low or too high, the The gearbox adapts to driving on slippery gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then roads. the actual gear engaged is displayed. This programme improves starting and drive It is possible to change from position when traction is poor. D (automatic) to position M (manual) at any time. When the vehicle is stationary or moving very slowly, the gearbox selects gear M1 T appears in the instrument panel. automatically. The sport and snow programmes do not operate in manual mode.
93 Driving
Stopping the vehicle Operating fault
Invalid value during manual Before switching off the engine, you can When the ignition is on, the operation engage position P or N to place the gearbox in lighting of this warning lamp, neutral. accompanied by an audible signal and a This symbol is displayed if a gear In both cases, apply the parking brake to message in the multifunction screen, indicates is not engaged correctly (selector immobilise the vehicle. a gearbox fault. between two positions). In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel a substantial knock when changing from P If the selector is not in position P, to R and from N to R. This will not cause any when the driver's door is opened or damage to the gearbox. approximately 45 seconds after the Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h), local speed ignition is switched off, a warning restrictions permitting. message appears in the screen. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified F Return the selector to position P; workshop as soon as possible. the message disappears. When driving on flooded roads or when There is a risk of damage to the crossing a ford, proceed at walking gearbox: pace. - if you press the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time, - if you force the movement of the selector from the P position to another position when the battery is flat. To reduce fuel consumption when at a prolonged standstill with the engine running (traffic jam...), put the selector in the N position and apply the parking brake.
94 Driving Automatic gearbox (EAT6) 6-speed automatic gearbox which offers a Gear selector positions choice between the ease of fully automatic Displays in the instrument panel operation, enhanced by sport and snow programmes, or manual gear changing. Two driving modes are available: - automatic operation for electronic management of the gears by the gearbox, with the sport programme for a more dynamic driving style or the snow programme to improve driving on slippery surfaces, 5 - manual operation for sequential changing of the gears by the driver. P. Park. When you move the selector to select a - Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake position, the corresponding indicator is on or off. displayed in the instrument panel. - Starting the engine. P. Park R. Reverse. Gear selector gate R. Reverse - Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle stationary, N. Neutral engine at idle. D. Drive (Automatic operation) N. Neutral. S. Sport programme. - Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake T. Snow programme. on. 1 2 3 4 5 6. G ears engaged during manual - Starting the engine. operation D. Automatic operation. -. Invalid value during manual operation M + / -. Manual operation with sequential changing of the six gears. F Push forward to change up through the gears. 1. Gear selector. or 2. "S" (sport) button. F Pull backward to change down through the T 3. " " (snow) button. gears. 95 Driving
Moving off F With your foot on the brake, When the engine is running at idle, select position P or N. with the brakes released, if position R, D or M is selected, the vehicle moves F Start the engine. even without the accelerator being If these conditions are not met, there is an pressed. audible signal, accompanied by the display of When the engine is running, never an warning message. leave children in the vehicle without F With the engine running, press the brake supervision. pedal. When carrying out maintenance with F Release the parking brake. the engine running, apply the parking F Select position R, D or M. brake and select position P. F Gradually release the brake pedal. The vehicle moves off immediately.
If position N is selected inadvertently while driving, allow the engine to return to idle then select position D before accelerating.
If the ambient temperature is below -23°C, the engine should be left at idle for four minutes, to ensure the correct operation and life of the engine and gearbox.
96 Driving
Automatic operation
F Select position D for automatic changing Reverse T snow programme of the six gears. When selecting reverse R with the ignition on, F Press the "T" button, once the engine has The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive the rear parking sensors are activated. started. mode, without any intervention on the part For more information, refer to the "Rear parking The gearbox adapts itself to driving on slippery of the driver. It continuously selects the most sensors" section. roads. suitable gear according to the style of driving, This programme helps moving off and improves the profile of the road and the load in the traction when grip is poor. vehicle. 5 For maximum acceleration without touching the selector, press the accelerator pedal down T appears in the instrument panel. fully (kick down). The gearbox changes down automatically or maintains the gear selected Sport and snow programmes until the maximum engine speed is reached. These two special programmes complete On braking, the gearbox changes down At any time, press the button selected the automatic operation, for use in particular automatically to provide efficient engine again to leave the programme engaged circumstances. braking. and return to auto-adaptive mode. As a safety measure, if you release the accelerator sharply, the gearbox will not "S" sport programme change up. F Press the "S" button, once the engine has started. The gearbox automatically allows a more dynamic driving style.
Never select position N while the S appears in the instrument panel. vehicle is moving. Never select positions P or R unless the vehicle is completely stationary.
97 Driving
Manual operation Operating fault F Select position M for sequential changing Invalid value during manual of the six gears. operation With the ignition on, illumination of F Move the selector towards the + sign to this warning lamp, accompanied This symbol is displayed if a gear by an audible signal and a message in the change up a gear. is not engaged correctly (selector F multifunction screen, indicates a gearbox fault. Move the selector towards the - sign to between two positions). change down a gear. In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up It is only possible to change from one gear to mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel another if the vehicle speed and engine speed a substantial knock when changing from P permit; otherwise, the gearbox will operate Stopping the vehicle to R and from N to R. This will not cause any temporarily in automatic mode. damage to the gearbox. Before switching off the engine, you can Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h), local speed engage position P or N to place the gearbox in restrictions permitting. D disappears and the gears neutral. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified engaged appear in succession in the In both cases, apply the parking brake to workshop as soon as possible. instrument panel. immobilise the vehicle. If the engine speed is too low or too high, the There is a risk of damage to the gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then If the selector is not in position P, gearbox: the actual gear engaged is displayed. when the driver's door is opened or - if you press the accelerator and It is possible to change from position D approximately 45 seconds after the brake pedals at the same time, (automatic) to position M (manual) at any time. ignition is switched off, a warning - if you force the movement of the When the vehicle is stationary or moving message appears in the screen. selector from the P position to very slowly, the gearbox engages first gear F Return the selector to position P; another position when the battery is automatically. the message disappears. discharged. When driving on flooded roads or when To reduce fuel consumption when at crossing a ford, proceed at walking a prolonged standstill with the engine pace. running (traffic jam...), put the selector The sport and snow programmes are in the N position and apply the parking not available when operating manually. brake.
98 Driving Gear shift indicator System which reduces fuel consumption by advising the driver to change up. Operation Depending on the driving situation and your Example: vehicle's equipment, the system may advise you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can follow this instruction without engaging the intermediate gears. The gear engagement recommendations must not be considered compulsory. In fact, the configuration of the road, the amount of traffic - The system may suggest that you engage 5 and safety remain determining factors when a higher gear. choosing the best gear. Therefore, the driver remains responsible for deciding whether or not The information appears in the instrument panel in the form of an arrow. to follow the advice given by the system. - You are in third gear. This function cannot be deactivated. On vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox, the arrow may be accompanied by the gear recommended.
The system adapts its gear change With an electronic or automatic recommendation according to the gearbox, the system is only active in driving conditions (slope, load, ...) and manual mode. the demands of the driver (power, acceleration, braking, ...). - You press the accelerator pedal. The system never suggests: - engaging first gear, - engaging reverse gear, - engaging a lower gear.
99 Driving Stop & Start The Stop & Start system puts the engine temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, or other...). The engine restarts automatically - START mode - as soon as you want to move off. The restart takes place instantly, quickly and silently. Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions as well as the noise level when stationary.
Operation Going into engine STOP mode Special cases: STOP mode not available The "ECO" warning lamp comes STOP mode is not invoked when: For your comfort, during parking on in the instrument panel and the - the driver's door is open, manoeuvres, STOP mode is not engine goes into standby: - the driver's seat belt is not fastened, available for a few seconds after - the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph - for e-HDi Diesel engines: coming out of reverse gear. (10 km/h) since the last engine start using ● with a manual gearbox, at speeds Stop & Start does not affect the the key, below 12 mph (20 km/h), when you place vehicle's systems, such as for example, - the engine is needed to maintain a the gear selector into neutral, and you braking, power steering... release the clutch pedal, comfortable temperature in the passenger ● with an electronic gearbox, at speeds compartment, below 5 mph (8 km/h), when you press - demisting has been selected, the brake pedal or place the gear - some special conditions (battery charge, selector into position N, engine temperature, braking assistance, - for e-VTI and e-THP petrol engines and ambient temperature...) where the engine is BlueHDi Diesel engines, with the vehicle Never refuel with the engine in STOP needed to assure control of a system. stationary. mode; you must switch off the ignition with the key. The "ECO" warning lamp flashes for A time counter calculates the sum a few seconds then goes off. of the periods in STOP mode during a journey. It rests itself This operation is perfectly normal. to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the key. 100 Driving
Manual deactivation Going into engine START mode Special cases: START invoked automatically The "ECO" warning lamp goes off For reasons of safety and for your comfort, and the engine starts: START mode is invoked automatically when:
- with a manual gearbox, when you - you open the driver's door, depress the clutch pedal, - you unfasten the driver's seat belt, - with an electronic / automatic gearbox: - the speed of the vehicle exceeds 7 mph 5 ● gear selector in position A / D or M, (11 km/h) with an electronic gearbox, when you release the brake pedal, - some special conditions (battery charge, ● or gear lever in position N and the brake engine temperature, braking assistance, In certain circumstances, such as the need pedal released, when you place the gear ambient temperature...) where the engine is to maintain a comfortable temperature in the selector into position A / D or M, needed for control of a system. passenger compartment, it may be preferable ● or when you engage reverse gear. to deactivate the Stop & Start system. With a manual gearbox in STOP mode, if you The system can be deactivated at any time, engage a gear without fully depressing the once the ignition is on. clutch pedal, a message is displayed asking The "ECO" warning lamp flashes for you to fully depress the clutch pedal so that the a few seconds, then goes off. At any time, press the "ECO OFF" switch to engine can restart. deactivate the system. This is confirmed by the switch warning lamp This operation is perfectly normal. coming on accompanied by a message in the screen.
If the system has been deactivated in STOP mode, the engine restarts immediately.
101 Driving
Manual reactivation Operating fault
Press the "ECO OFF" switch again. The system is active again; this is confirmed The Stop & Start requires the use of a by the switch warning lamp going off, 12 V battery of special specification and accompanied by a message in the screen. technology. All work on this type of battery must be carried out only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. The system is reactivated automatically For more information on the at every new start using the key. 12 V battery, refer to the corresponding section.
In the event of a fault with the system, the "ECO OFF" switch warning lamp flashes then comes on continuously. Opening the bonnet Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a Before doing anything under the bonnet, qualified workshop. deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid the In the event of a fault in STOP mode, the risk of injury related to an automatic change to vehicle may stall. All of the warning lamps START mode. come on. It is then necessary to switch off the ignition and start the engine again using Driving on flooded roads the key. Before driving through a flooded road, it is strongly recommended that you deactivate the Stop & Start system. For more advice on driving, particularly on flooded roads, refer to the corresponding section.
102 Driving Hill start assist System which keeps your vehicle immobilised Operation temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when starting on a gradient, the time it takes to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. This function is only active when: - the vehicle is completely stationary, with your foot on the brake pedal, - when certain conditions of gradient are met, - with the driver’s door closed. 5 The hill start assist function cannot be deactivated.
On an ascending slope, the vehicle is held On a descending slope, with the vehicle for a brief moment when you release the stationary and reverse gear engaged, the brake pedal: vehicle is held for a brief moment when you - if you are in first gear or neutral with a release the brake pedal. manual gearbox*, - if you are in position A or M with an electronic gearbox, Operating fault Do not leave the vehicle while it is being - if you are in position D or M with an held in the hill start assist phase. automatic gearbox. If you need to leave the vehicle while the engine is running, apply the parking brake manually then ensure that the parking brake warning lamp is on (not If a fault occurs with the system, these warning flashing) in the instrument panel. lamps come on. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system * Depending on version. checked. 103 Driving Speed limiter System which prevents the vehicle from Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel exceeding the speed programmed by the driver. When the programmed speed limit is reached, pressing the accelerator pedal in the normal manner no longer has any effect.
The speed limiter is switched on manually: the programmed speed must be at least 20 mph (30 km/h).
The speed limiter is switched off by manual operation of the control.
The programmed speed can be exceeded temporarily by pressing the accelerator firmly. The programmed information is grouped To return to the programmed speed, simply together in the instrument panel screen. slow down to a speed below the programmed 5. Speed limiter on/off indication. speed. 1. Selection of speed limiter mode. 6. Speed limiter mode selection indication. 7. Programmed speed value. 8. Selection of a memorised speed setting. The programmed speed remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.
The speed limiter cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need to respect speed limits, nor can it replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. 2. Increase the programmed value. 3. Decrease the programmed value. 4. Speed limiter On / Off.
104 Driving
Programming Leaving limiter mode F Turn thumb wheel 1 to the F Turn thumb wheel 1 to the "0" position: "LIMIT" position: the speed limiter the speed limiter mode is deselected. The mode is selected but is not switched on display returns to the distance recorder. (PAUSE). You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in order to set the speed. Operating fault
F Set the speed value by pressing button 2 or 3. You can then change the programmed speed using buttons 2 and 3: 5 - by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press, - by + or - 5 mph (km/h) = long press, - in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained press. In the event of a speed limiter fault, the speed is cleared resulting in flashing of the dashes. F Switch the speed limiter on by pressing button 4. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a F Switch the speed limiter off by pressing button 4: the display qualified workshop. confirms that it has been switched off (PAUSE). F Switch the speed limiter back on by pressing button 4 again. On a steep descent or in the event of sharp acceleration, the speed limiter Exceeding the programmed speed will not be able to prevent the vehicle Pressing the accelerator pedal to exceed the programmed speed will not have from exceeding the programmed speed. any effect unless you press the pedal firmly past the point of resistance. To avoid any risk of jamming of the The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and the programmed speed, pedals: which is still displayed, flashes. - ensure that the mat is positioned Returning to the programmed speed, by means of intentional or unintentional correctly, deceleration of the vehicle, automatically cancels the flashing of the - do not fit one mat on top of another. programmed speed.
105 Driving Cruise control System which automatically maintains the Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel speed of the vehicle at the value programmed by the driver, without any action on the accelerator pedal.
The cruise control is switched on manually: it requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph (40 km/h), as well as the engagement of: - fourth gear on a manual gearbox, - second gear on an electronic or automatic gearbox, in manual sequential mode, - position A on an electronic gearbox or position D on an automatic gearbox.
The programmed information is grouped together in the instrument panel screen. 1. Selection of cruise control mode. 5. Cruise control stopped/resumed indication. 6. Cruise control mode selection indication. The cruise control is switched off manually 7. Programmed speed value. or by pressing the brake or clutch pedal or on 8. Selectiion of a memorised speed setting. triggering of the electronic stability system for safety reasons. It is possible to exceed the programmed speed temporarily by pressing the accelerator pedal. To return to the programmed speed, simply release the accelerator pedal. Switching off the ignition cancels any The cruise control cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need to observe programmed speed value. 2. Increase the programmed value. speed limits, nor can it replace the need for 3. Decrease the programmed value. vigilance on the part of the driver. 4. Cruise control Off / Resume.
106 Driving
Operating fault Programming F Turn thumb wheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position: the cruise control mode is selected but is not switched on (PAUSE). F Set the programmed speed by In the event of a cruise control malfunction, accelerating to the required speed, the speed is cleared resulting in flashing of the then press button 2 or 3. dashes. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer You can then change the programmed speed using buttons 2 and 3: or a qualified workshop. - by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press, 5 - by + or - 5 mph (km/h) = long press, When the cruise control is switched on, - in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained press. be careful if you maintain the pressure on one of the programmed speed changing buttons: this may result in F Switch off the cruise control by pressing button 4: the screen a very rapid change in the speed of confirms that it has been switched off (PAUSE). your vehicle. F Switch the cruise control back on by pressing button 4 Do not use the cruise control on again. slippery roads or in heavy traffic. On a steep descent, the cruise control Exceeding the programmed speed will not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed. Intentional or unintentional exceeding of the programmed speed To avoid any risk of jamming of the results in flashing of this speed in the screen. pedals: Return to the programmed speed, by means of intentional or - ensure that the mat is positioned unintentional deceleration of the vehicle, automatically cancels the correctly, flashing of the speed. - never fit one mat on top of another. Leaving cruise control mode F Turn thumb wheel 1 to the "0" position: the cruise control mode is deselected. The display returns to the distance recorder.
107 Driving Memorising speeds This memorisation of speeds applies to both Memorisation the speed limiter (limit speed) and the cruise control (running speed). You can memorise up to 5 speed settings in the system. By default, a few speeds are already memorised.
Enter the new value using the virtual keypad, then press on "Confirm". Press the MENU button for access to the different menus. Press on "Confirm" to save the modifications and quit the menu.
Select the "Driving" menu. As a safety measure, the driver should carry out these operations when Display the secondary page. stationary.
Use this button to select all speeds. In the secondary page, select "Speed settings". Use this button to deselect all Choose the speed that you want to modify, then speeds. press on "Modify". This button restores the factory settings.
108 Driving
Selection
5
To select a memorised speed: F press and hold button "+" or "-"; the system stops at the closest memorised speed, F press and hold button "+" or "-" again to select another memorised speed. A reminder of the speed and the state of the system (on / off) is displayed in the instrument panel.
109 Driving Parking sensors Rear parking sensors
The system is switched on by engaging reverse gear. This is confirmed by an audible signal. The system is switched off when you come out of reverse gear.
This system indicates the proximity of an Visual assistance obstacle (pedestrian, vehicle, tree, gate, etc.) This supplements the audible signal by which comes within the field of detection of displaying bars in the screen which move sensors located in the bumper. progressively nearer to the vehicle. Certain types of obstacle (stake, roadworks When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger" cone, etc.) detected initially will no longer be symbol is displayed in the screen. detected at the end of the manoeuvre, if they are located in blind spots in the sensors' field Audible assistance of detection. The proximity information is given by an intermittent audible signal, the frequency of which increases as the vehicle approaches the obstacle. This system cannot in any circumstances replace The sound emitted by the speaker (right or left) the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. indicates the side on which the obstacle is located. When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle becomes less than approximately thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes continuous.
110 Driving
Front parking sensors* Operating fault
In addition to the rear parking sensors, the In the event of a malfunction of front parking sensors are triggered when an the system, when reverse gear obstacle is detected in front and the speed of is engaged this warning lamp the vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h). is displayed in the instrument panel and/or a The front parking sensors are interrupted if message appears in the screen, accompanied the vehicle stops for more than 3 seconds by an audible signal (short beep). in forward gear, if no further obstacles are Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified detected or when the speed of the vehicle workshop. 5 exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). In bad weather or in winter, ensure The sound emitted by the speaker (front or that the sensors are not covered with rear) indicates whether the obstacle is in front Deactivation / Activation of the mud, ice or snow. When reverse gear is or behind. front and rear parking sensors engaged, an audible signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors may be dirty. The function is deactivated by pressing this Certain sound sources (motorcycle, button. The indicator lamp in the button lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may trigger comes on. the audible signals of the parking Pressing this button again reactivates the sensor system. function. The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
The function will be deactivated automatically if a trailer is being towed or a bicycle carrier is fitted (vehicle fitted with a towbar or bicycle carrier recommended by PEUGEOT).
* Available only with the Park Assist system. 111 Driving Reversing camera The blue lines represent the general direction of the vehicle (the difference corresponds to the width of your vehicle without the mirrors). The red lines represent a distance of about 30 cm beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear bumper. The green lines represent distances of about 1 and 2 metres beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear bumper. The turquoise blue curves represent the maximum turning circle.
The reversing camera is activated automatically High pressure jet washing when reverse gear is engaged. When washing your vehicle, do not Opening the tailgate causes the display Depending on version, the image is displayed direct the lance within 30 cm of the to disappear. in the touch screen or the instrument panel. camera lens. The reversing camera function may be Clean the reversing camera regularly using a completed with parking sensors. The superimposed representation of guide soft, dry cloth. lines helps with the manoeuvre. The reversing camera cannot in any They are represented by lines marked "on circumstances be a substitute for the ground" and do not allow the position of vigilance on the part of the driver. the vehicle to be determined relative to tall obstacles (for example: other vehicles, ...).
Some deformation of the image is normal. It is normal to be able to see part of the number plate at the bottom of the screen.
112 Driving Park Assist The system detects a parking space and then provides assistance with the parallel parking manoeuvres. It controls the steering and provides visual and audible information to the driver. The driver manages the accelerator, brakes, gears and the clutch in the case of a manual gearbox.
The driver can take back control of the steering The Park Assist system cannot in any For entry into a parking space (parallel at any time by grasping the wheel. circumstances replace the need for parking) the system does not detect vigilance on the part of the driver. spaces which are clearly much smaller The driver must remain in control of or larger than the size of the vehicle. their vehicle ensuring that the space This "parking assistance" system 5 remains clear during the manoeuvre. is activated automatically during In some circumstances, the sensors manoeuvres; it is therefore possible may not detect small obstacles located that a symbol comes on in the screen, in their blind spots. accompanied by an audible signal, without affecting the manoeuvre.
During a manoeuvre the steering wheel Changing tyre sizes (out-size tyres, turns quickly: do not hold the steering winter tyres, ...) can interfere with The system provides assistance in entering and wheel, do not place your hand between the correct operation of the parking exiting a parking space when parallel parking. the spokes of the steering wheel and assistance system. take care with loose and bulky clothing, scarves, handbags... There is a risk of injury. The selection of the type of manoeuvre (entering or exiting a parallel parking space) prevents a change to STOP mode of Stop & Start. In STOP mode, this selection restarts the engine.
113 Driving
Entering a parallel parking space F When you have identified a free space, reduce the speed of the vehicle to a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h).
F Operate the direction indicator on the F Move your vehicle forward until a new parking side. message is displayed.
F Position your vehicle before this space.
F Move forwards alongside the parking F Select reverse and release the steering space at a speed below 12 mph (20 km/h) wheel. To activate the Park Assist system: to measure it, keeping at a distance of F Press this control to activate the system. between 0.5 and 1.5 metres from the row of The indicator lamp in the control remains off. parked vehicles. Once measurement is complete, if the space is A message is displayed in the screen. large enough a message indicates that parking F Select the enter parking space manoeuvre. is possible. The indicator lamp in the control comes on.
114 Driving
Exit from a parallel parking space F When you want to exit from a parallel parking space, start the engine.
The assisted parking manoeuvre is in progress. The assisted exit from parking manoeuvre is in Without exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h), continue progress. 5 the manoeuvres following the information given Without exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h), continue the by the "parking assistance" system, until the manoeuvres following the information given by end of manoeuvre message is displayed. the "parking assistance" system, until the end of The indicator lamp in the control goes off, With the vehicle stationary, to activate the Park manoeuvre message is displayed. accompanied by a audible signal. Assist system: The manoeuvre is complete once the front wheels F Press this control. of the vehicle are out of the parking space. The indicator lamp in the control remains off. The indicator lamp in the control goes off, accompanied by a audible signal. A message is displayed in the screen. F Select the exit parking space manoeuvre. The indicator lamp in the control comes on. F Operate the direction indicator on the exit from parking side. The direction indicator warning lamp flashes in the instrument panel throughout the manoeuvre, whatever the position of the stalk. The driver takes back control of the vehicle's F Select a forward or reverse gear then The driver takes back control of the vehicle's steering. release the steering wheel. steering. 115 Driving
Deactivation Operating faults The system is deactivated automatically: A message is displayed in the screen. - on switching off the ignition, In the event of a fault with the system, - if the engine stalls, this warning lamp is displayed in the - if no manoeuvre is started within 5 minutes instrument panel and/or a message appears in the of selection of the type of manoeuvre, screen, accompanied by an audible signal (short beep). - after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during The indicator lamp in the control flashes for a few a manoeuvre, seconds. If the problem occurs while using the system, - if the road wheel anti-spin regulation (ASR) the indicator lamp goes off. is triggered, In the event of a fault with - if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the the power steering, these stated limit, The driver then takes back control of the warning lamps come on in - when the driver interrupts movement of the vehicle's steering. the instrument panel. steering wheel, Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified - if the driver presses the Park Assist workshop. control, - if correct positioning of the vehicle is not If the lateral distance between your vehicle possible (too many manoeuvres needed to and the space is too great, the system may insert or extract the vehicle), Switching off not be able to measure the space. - if the driver's door is open, Anything projecting beyond the envelope The system is switched off automatically: of the vehicle (long or wide load) is not - if one of the front wheels encounters an - when towing a trailer, taken into account by the Park Assist obstacle. - if the driver's door is opened, system during a manoeuvre. - if the speed of the vehicle is above 42 mph (70 km/h). In bad weather and in winter, ensure To switch the system of for a prolonged period, that the sensors are not covered by road dirt, ice or snow. If the system is deactivated during a contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified In the event of a fault, have the system manoeuvre, the drive should reactivate workshop. checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a it manually to repeat the measurement. qualified workshop.
116 Visibility Lighting
Main lighting Additional lighting Automatic lighting The vehicle has various exterior lamps: Other lamps are fitted to meet particular driving functions - sidelamps, to be seen, conditions: Various automatic lighting functions are also - dipped beam headlamps to see without - a rear foglamp to better signal the available depending on options: dazzling other drivers, presence of the vehicle in foggy conditions, - guide-me-home lighting, - main beam headlamps to see clearly when - front foglamps with cornering lighting, - cornering lighting, the road is clear. - daytime running lamps to be seen during - welcome lighting, the day, - daytime running lamps, - guide-me-home and welcome lighting for - automatic illumination of headlamps. leaving and entering the vehicle. 6
In some weather conditions (e.g. low temperature or humidity), the presence of misting on the internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal; it disappears after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.
117 Visibility
Selection ring for main lighting mode Turn the ring to align the desired symbol with the marking.
Lighting off (ignition off) / Front daytime running lamps (engine running).
Automatic illumination of headlamps.
Sidelamps only. Dipping the headlamps Dipped or main beam headlamps. Pull the stalk to switch the lighting between dipped / main beam headlamps. Model without AUTO lighting In the lighting off and sidelamps modes, the driver can switch on the main beam headlamps temporarily ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a pull on the stalk.
Display Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp in the instrument panel confirms the lighting switched on. Model with AUTO lighting
118 Visibility
Foglamps selection ring The foglamps operate with dipped and main beam headlamps.
6
Rear foglamp only Front foglamps and rear foglamp
F To switch it on, turn the ring forwards. Rotate and release the ring: When the headlamps switch off with automatic When the lighting is switched off automatically F forwards a first time to switch on the front illumination of headlamps (AUTO model) (with AUTO model), the foglamp and the dipped foglamps, or when the dipped beam headlamps are beam headlamps will remain on. F forwards a second time to switch on the switched off manually, the foglamps and F To switch it off, turn the ring rearwards. rear foglamp, sidelamps remain on. F rearwards a first time to switch off the rear F Turn the ring rearwards to switch off foglamp, the foglamps, the sidelamps will then F rearwards a second time to switch off the switch off. front foglamps.
119 Visibility
In good or rainy weather, both day Switching off the lamps Switching on the lamps and night, the front foglamps and the when the ignition is after the ignition is rear foglamp are prohibited. In these switched off switched off situations, the power of their beams On switching off the ignition, all of the To reactivate the lighting control, rotate may dazzle other drivers. They should lamps turn off immediately, except for the ring to the "0" position - lamps off, only be used in fog or snow. dipped beam if guide-me-home lighting then to the desired position. In these weather conditions, it is your is activated. On opening the driver's door a responsibility to switch on the foglamps temporary audible signal warns the and dipped beam headlamps manually driver that the lighting is on. as the sunshine sensor may detect The lamps, with the exception of the sufficient light. sidelamps, switch off automatically after Do not forget to switch off the front a maximum duration of 30 minutes to foglamps and the rear foglamp when avoid discharging the battery. they are no longer necessary.
120 Visibility
LED lamps Daytime running lamps
Daytime lighting, compulsory in certain The instruments and controls (instrument countries, which comes on automatically when panel, touch screen, air conditioning control the engine is started making the vehicle more panel, ...) are not illuminated, except in night visible to other users. mode with manual or automatic illumination of headlamps.
This function is assured: - in countries where it is imposed by regulations, by illumination of the dipped beam headlamps with the sidelamps and number plate lamps; this function cannot be 6 They come on when the engine is started. deactivated. Depending on the country of sale, they are - for other countries where it is provided, used for: by the use of dedicated lamps (LEDs); this - daytime running lamps* in day mode and function can be activated or deactivated via sidelamps in night mode (they are brighter the vehicle configuration menu. when daytime running lamps), The lighting control stalk must be placed in or the "0" or "AUTO" (day mode) position. - sidelamps in day and night mode. Deactivation of the daytime running lamps is effective after operation of the lighting control stalk or after the next engine start; activation is effective immediately.
* F unction that can be set in the vehicle configuration menu. 121 Visibility
Manual guide-me-home Parking lamps lighting Temporarily keeping the dipped beam headlamps on after the vehicle's ignition has been switched off makes the driver's exit easier when the light is poor.
Side markers for the vehicle by illumination of the sidelamps on the traffic side only. F Within one minute of switching off the On Off ignition, operate the lighting control stalk F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps The manual guide-me-home lighting switches up or down depending on the traffic side using the lighting stalk. off automatically after a set time. (for example: when parking on the left; F A further "headlamp flash" switches the lighting control stalk upwards; the right function off. hand sidelamps are on).
Manual guide-me-home lighting is also available from the remote This is confirmed by an audible signal and control lighting button (refer to the illumination of the corresponding direction corresponding section). indicator warning lamp in the instrument panel. To switch off the parking lamps, return the lighting control stalk to the middle position or switch on the ignition. 122 Visibility
Automatic illumination of headlamps
The sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are Automatic guide-me-home Operating fault switched on automatically, without any action lighting In the event of a fault with the on the part of the driver, when a low level of Association with the automatic lighting provides sunshine sensor, the lighting external light is detected or in certain cases of the guide-me-home lighting with the following comes on, this warning lamp activation of the windscreen wipers. additional options: is displayed in the instrument panel and/or a As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient - selection of the lighting duration of 15, 30 message appears in the screen, accompanied level or after the windscreen wipers are switched or 60 seconds, by an audible signal. off, the lamps are switched off automatically. - automatic activation of guide-me-home Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified lighting when the automatic illumination of workshop. headlamps is in operation. Programming Settings for the guide-me-home lighting can be adjusted in the touch screen. In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor 6 may detect sufficient light. In this Press the MENU button for access to case, the lighting will not come on the different menus. automatically. Do not cover the sunshine sensor, Select the "Driving" menu. coupled with the rain sensor and Switching on located in the centre of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror; the F Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position. Display the secondary page. associated functions would no longer Activation of the function is accompanied be controlled. by a message in the screen. Switching off Select "Vehicle settings". F Turn the ring to another position. Deactivation of the function is Select the "Lighting" tab. accompanied by a message in the screen.
Modify the settings for the "Guide- me-home lighting" function. 123 Visibility Headlamp adjustment
To avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, the headlamp beams should be adjusted Travelling abroad according to the load in the vehicle. If using your vehicle in a country that 0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats. drives on the other side of the road, the -. Intermediate setting headlamps must be adjusted to avoid 1. 5 people. dazzling on-coming drivers. -. 5 people + maximum authorised load. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a 2. Driver + maximum authorised load. qualified workshop.
The initial setting is position "0".
124 Visibility Cornering lighting Switching on This function starts: - when the corresponding direction indicator is switched on, or - from a certain angle of rotation of the steering wheel.
Switching off With dipped or main beams, this function without cornering lighting The system does not operate: makes use of the beam from a front foglamp - below a certain angle of rotation of the to illuminate the inside of a bend, when the 6 steering wheel, vehicle speed is below 25 mph (approximately - above 25 mph (40 km/h), 40 km/h) (urban driving, winding road, - when reverse gear is engaged. intersections, parking manoeuvres...).
with cornering lighting
125 Visibility Wiper controls The vehicle's front and rear wipers are Manual controls Windscreen wipers designed to improve the driver's visibility The wipers are controlled directly by the Wiping speed: progressively according to the climatic driver. conditions. Fast (heavy rain).
Programming Normal (moderate rain). Various automatic wiper control modes are also available according to the following options: Intermittent (proportional to the - automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers, speed of the vehicle). - rear wiping on engaging reverse gear. Park.
Single wipe (press down and release). Model without AUTO wiping Automatic (press down and release). Single wipe (pull the stalk briefly towards you).
Windscreen wash Pull the wiper stalk towards you. The windscreen wash, then the windscreen wipers, operate for a pre-determined time. Model with AUTO wiping
126 Visibility
Reverse gear When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper will come into operation if the windscreen wipers are operating.
Programming Operation of the rear wiper in reverse is a setting in the touch screen.
Press the MENU button for access to the different menus. Rear wiper 6 Rear wiper selection ring: Select the "Driving" menu.
Park. Display the secondary page.
Intermittent wipe. Select "Vehicle settings".
Select the "Driving assistance" tab. Wash-wipe (set duration). If a significant accumulation of snow or ice is present, or when using a bicycle Activate / Deactivate the "Automatic carrier on the boot, deactivate the rear wiper in reverse" function. automatic rear wiper via the vehicle configuration menu. This function is activated by default.
127 Visibility
Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers The windscreen wipers operate automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, if rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of the rainfall.
Switching on Switching off Briefly push the control stalk Briefly push the control stalk The automatic rain sensitive windscreen downwards. downwards again, or place the wipers must be reactivated by pushing A wiping cycle confirms that the control stalk in another position (Int, the control stalk downwards, if the instruction has been accepted. 1 or 2). ignition has been off for more than This warning lamp comes on in the This warning lamp goes off in the instrument 1 minute. instrument panel and a message is panel and a message is displayed. displayed.
128 Visibility
Special position of the windscreen wipers Operating fault If a fault occurs with the automatic rain sensitive wipers, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode. Have it checked by PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
This position permits release of the windscreen To maintain the effectiveness of the Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with wiper blades. 6 "flat-blade" type of wiper blades, it is the sunshine sensor and located in the It is used for cleaning or replacement of the advisable to: centre of the windscreen behind the rear wiper blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to - handle them with care, view mirror. release the wiper blades from the windscreen. Switch off the automatic rain sensitive - clean them regularly using soapy wipers when using an automatic car wash. water, F In winter, it is advisable to wait until Any action on the wiper stalk within one - avoid using them to retain the windscreen is completely clear of minute after switching off the ignition, cardboard on the windscreen, ice before activating the automatic rain places the wiper blades vertically on the - replace them at the first signs of sensitive wipers. screen. wear. F To park the wiper blades again, switch on the ignition and operate the wiper stalk.
129 Visibility Lighting dimmer System for the manual adjustment of the brightness of the instrument panel and the touch screen to suit the ambient light level. LCD instrument panel Matrix instrument panel Touch screen
Press the MENU button for access to the different menus.
Select the "Settings" menu.
Display the secondary page.
In the secondary page, select "Screen settings". With the headlamps on, press button B to Activation F increase the brightness of the instruments press the button to adjust the brightness of Adjust the brightness by moving the cursor. and controls and the interior mood lighting or the instruments and controls, button A to reduce it. F release the button when the desired level is As soon as the lighting reaches the required attained. level of brightness, release the button. You can also switch of the screen. To do this:
Switching off In the primary page, select "Turn When the vehicle lighting is off or in day mode off screen". The screen goes off (daytime running lamps on), pressing the button completely. has no effect. Press the screen again (anywhere in its surface) to activate it.
130 Visibility Courtesy lamps Map reading lamps
In this position, the courtesy F With the ignition on, press lamp comes on gradually: the corresponding switch.
- when the vehicle is unlocked, - when the key is removed from the ignition, - when opening a door, Take care to avoid leaving anything in - when the remote control locking button is contact with the courtesy lamp. pressed, in order to locate your vehicle.
It switches off gradually: - when the vehicle is locked, - when the ignition is switched on, 6 - 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
Permanently off.
Permanent lighting.
1. Front / rear courtesy lamps
2. Map reading lamps With the "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting time varies according to the circumstances: - with the ignition off, approximately 10 minutes, - in energy economy mode, approximately 30 seconds, - with the engine running, unlimited.
131 Visibility Interior mood lighting The dimmed passenger compartment lighting improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is poor.
Switching on Settings Instrument panel mood The mood lighting settings can be adjusted in lighting the touch screen.
Press the MENU button for access to the different menus.
Select the "Driving" menu.
Display the secondary page.
At night, interior mood light emitting diodes - Select "Vehicle settings". Deactivation LEDs (courtesy lamp, instrument panel, With the exterior lighting on, press this button footwells, back-lit roof lining, panoramic glazed to turn the instrument panel mood lighting off. sunroof*...) come on automatically when the Select the "Lighting" tab. sidelamps are switched on. Activation Modify the settings of the "Mood lighting" function. With the exterior lighting on, press this button Switching off again turn the instrument panel mood lighting The interior mood lighting switches off back on. automatically when the sidelamps are switched off.
* Depending on version. 132 Visibility Panoramic glazed sunroof System which comprises configurable light guides and a panoramic tinted glass area to increase the light and visibility in the passenger compartment. It is fitted with an electric blind to improve temperature and acoustic comfort.
Electric blind
If something is trapped when operating the blind, you should reverse the movement of the blind. To do this press the control in question. When the driver operates the blind, they should ensure that nobody prevents its 6 correct closing. The driver should ensure that passengers use the blind correctly. Be aware of children when operating the blind. Opening Closing F Lift the control A towards the rear. F Lift the control A towards the front. The blind stops when you release the The blind stops when you release the control. control.
133 Safety General safety recommendations Labels are applied at various We draw your attention to Installation of accessory points on your vehicle. They carry the following points: radio communication safety warnings as well as vehicle - The fitting of electrical equipment transmitters identification information. Do not or accessories not listed by Before installing a radio communication remove them: they form an integral part PEUGEOT may cause faults and transmitter, you must contact a of your vehicle. failures with the electrical system of PEUGEOT dealer for the specification your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT of transmitters which can be fitted dealer for information on the range (frequency, maximum power, of recommended accessories. aerial position, specific installation - As a safety measure, access to requirements), in line with the Vehicle For any work on your vehicle, use the diagnostic socket, used for Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive a qualified workshop that has the the vehicle’s electronic systems, (2004/104/EC). technical information, skills and is reserved strictly for PEUGEOT equipment required, all of which a dealers or qualified workshops, PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. equipped with the special tools required (risk of malfunctions of the Depending on the legislation in force in vehicle’s electronic systems that the country, certain safety equipment could cause breakdowns or serious may be compulsory: high visibility safety vests, warning triangles, accidents). The manufacturer breathalyzers, spare bulbs, spare fuses, cannot be held responsible if this fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud flaps advice is not followed. at the rear of the vehicle. - Any modification or adaptation The fitting of electrical equipment not intended or authorised by or accessories which are not Automobiles PEUGEOT or recommended by PEUGEOT may result carried out without meeting the in a failure of your vehicle’s electronic technical requirements defined system and excessive electrical by the manufacturer would lead consumption. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer to the suspension of the legal and for information on the range of contractual warranties. recommended equipment and accessories. 134 Safety Direction indicators Hazard warning lamps Visual warning with of all the direction indicators flashing to alert other road users to a Three flashes vehicle breakdown, towing or accident. Move the stalk briefly upwards or downwards, without going beyond the point of resistance; the corresponding direction indicators will flash 3 times.
F Lower the lighting control stalk fully when This function can be used at any speed, moving to the left. but it is particularly useful for changing F Raise the lighting control stalk fully when F Press this button, all of the direction lane on fast roads. 7 moving to the right. indicators flash. They can operate with the ignition off.
Automatic operation If you forget to cancel the direction When braking in an emergency, depending on indicators for more than 20 seconds, the rate of deceleration, the lamps come on the volume of the audible signal will automatically. increase if the speed is above 40 mph They switch off automatically the first time you (60 km/h). accelerate. F You can also switch them off by pressing the button.
135 Safety Horn Emergency or assistance call Audible warning system to alert other road users to an imminent danger.
This system allows you to make an emergency or assistance call to the emergency services or to the dedicated PEUGEOT service.
F Press the central part of the multifunction For more information on the use of this steering wheel. function, refer to the "Audio equipment and telematics" section. Use the horn moderately and only in situations allowed by the motoring regulations in the country you are driving in.
136 Safety Under-inflation detection System which automatically checks the pressures of the tyres while driving. The system monitors the pressures in the four The under-inflation detection system Driving with under-inflated tyres tyres, once the vehicle is moving. does not replace the need for vigilance increases fuel consumption. It compares the information given by the four on the part of the driver. wheel speed sensors with reference values, This system does not avoid the need to which must be reinitialised every time the check the tyre pressures (including the tyre pressures are adjusted or a wheel spare wheel) every month as well as The inflation pressures defined for changed. before a long journey. your vehicle can be found on the tyre The system triggers an alert as soon as it Driving with under-inflated tyres impairs pressure label. detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one road holding, extends braking distances For more information on the or more tyres. and causes premature tyre wear, identification markings, refer to the particularly under arduous conditions corresponding section. (high loading, high speed, long journey). Tyre pressures should be checked when the tyres are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km) at moderate 7 speeds). Otherwise (when hot), add 0.3 bar to the pressures shown on the label.
137 Safety
Reinitialisation It is necessary to reinitialise the system every Under-inflation alert time one or more tyre pressures are adjusted, This is given by fixed illumination of F In the event of a puncture, use the and after changing one or more wheels. this warning lamp, accompanied by temporary puncture repair kit or the spare an audible signal and, depending on wheel (depending on equipment), equipment, the display of a message. or F if you have a compressor, such as the one F Reduce speed immediately, avoid in the temporary puncture repair kit, check Before reinitialising the system, ensure excessive steering movements and sudden the pressures of the four tyres when cold, that the pressures of the four tyres are braking or correct for the use of the vehicle and in F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do F if it is not possible to make this check line with the recommendations on the so. immediately, drive carefully at reduced tyre pressure label. speed. The loss of pressure detected does not always cause visible bulging of the tyre. Do not satisfy yourself with just a visual The alert is maintained until the system check. is reinitialised. The under-inflation detection system does not give a warning if a pressure is incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.
138 Safety
Without touch screen With touch screen Operating fault
The flashing and then fixed illumination of the under-inflation warning lamp accompanied by illumination of the Service warning lamp indicates a fault with the system.
In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the Reinitialisation of the system is done with the tyres is no longer assured. F With the ignition on and the ignition on and the vehicle stationary. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT vehicle stationary, press this F Press the MENU button for dealer or a qualified workshop. button for about 3 seconds then access to the different menus. release it, an audible signal 7 confirms the reinitialisation. F Select the "Driving" menu.
Before doing anything to the system, F Press "Under-inflation the pressures of the four tyres must be The under-inflation alert can only be initialisation". checked and the system reinitialised. relied on if the reinitialisation of the system has been done with the pressures F Confirm the instruction by pressing "Yes", in the four tyres correctly adjusted. an audible signal and a message confirm the reinitialisation. Snow chains The new pressure settings registered The system does not have to be are considered to be reference values reinitialised after fitting or removing by the system. snow chains.
139 Safety Electronic stability control (ESC)
A set of the following Electronic Stability Definitions systems: - anti-lock braking system (ABS) and Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Anti-slip regulation (ASR) electronic brake force distribution (EBFD), and electronic brake force This system (also known as Traction Control) - emergency braking assistance, distribution (EBFD) optimises traction in order to avoid wheel - wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction These systems improve the stability and slip by acting on the brakes of the driving control, manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking wheels and on the engine. It also improves - dynamic stability control (DSC). and contribute towards improved control in the directional stability of the vehicle on corners, in particular on poor or slippery road acceleration. surfaces. The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of emergency braking. The electronic brake force distribution system manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel.
Emergency braking assistance Dynamic stability control (DSC) In an emergency, this system enables you to If there is a difference between the path reach the optimum braking pressure more followed by the vehicle and that required by the quickly and therefore reduce the stopping driver, this system monitors each wheel and distance. automatically acts on the brake of one or more It is triggered in relation to the speed at which wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a to the required path, within the limits of the laws reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an of physics. increase in the effectiveness of the braking.
140 Safety
Operation
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) When changing wheels (tyres and rims), and electronic brake force make sure that these are approved for distribution (EBFD) your vehicle. Normal operation of the ABS may make When this warning lamp comes on, itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake accompanied by an audible signal pedal. and a message, it indicates that there is a fault with the ABS, which could cause loss of control of the vehicle when braking. In emergency braking, press very firmly without releasing the When this warning lamp comes on, pressure. coupled with the STOP warning lamp, accompanied by an audible 7 signal and a message, it indicates that there is a fault with the electronic brake force distribution (EBFD), which could cause loss of control of the vehicle when braking. You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. In both cases, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
141 Safety
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal But it is recommended that the system be and a message in the screen, this reactivated as soon as possible. indicates a fault with the system. F Press the button or, depending Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified on version, turn the knob to this workshop to have the system checked. position. Dynamic stability control (DSC) and anti-slip regulation (ASR) The indicator lamp in the button or the knob comes on: the DSC system no longer acts on Activation the operation of the engine. The DSC system offers exceptional safety in normal driving, but this should These systems are activated automatically Reactivation not encourage the driver to take extra each time the vehicle is started. The system is reactivated automatically each risks or drive at high speed. As soon as they detect a problem of grip or time the ignition is switched back on or from The correct operation of the system trajectory, these systems act on the operation 30 mph (50 km/h). depends on observation of the of the engine and brakes. manufacturer’s recommendations This is indicated by flashing of this regarding the wheels (tyres and rims), warning lamp in the instrument panel. the braking components, the electronic components and the PEUGEOT assembly and operation procedures. Deactivation After an impact, have the system F Press the button again to In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a reactivate it manually. which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft qualified workshop. ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate the DSC system, so that the wheels can move freely and regain grip. 142 Safety Grip control Special patented traction control system which improves traction on snow, mud and sand. This system, the operation of which has been optimised for each situation, allows you to manoeuvre in most conditions of poor grip (encountered during touring use).
Associated with all-seasons Peak Mountain Snow Flake tyres, this system offers a compromise between safety, adhesion and traction. These tyres work equally well in winter Differents modes are provided: and summer. Standard (ESC) Snow The accelerator pedal should be pressed This mode is calibrated for a low level of wheel This mode adapts its strategy to the conditions sufficiently to allow the system to use the power spin, based on the different levels of grip of grip encountered for each of the two front 7 of the engine. Operation at high engine speeds normally encountered on the road. wheels on moving off. is completely normal. (mode active up to 30 mph (50 km/h)) F Place the dial in this position. F Place the dial in this position.
A five-position selector allows you to choose the setting best suited to the driving conditions encountered. An indicator lamp associated with each mode Every time the ignition is switched off, comes on to confirm your choice. the system automatically resets to this A specific and additional display appears mode. temporarily in the touch screen to confirm the selection made with the knob.
143 Safety
You can deactivate certain functions of the ESC (ASR and DSC) by turning the dial to the "OFF" position. These functions are reactivated automatically from 30 mph (50 km/h) or every time the ignition is switched back on.
Driving advice Your vehicle is designed principally to All terrain (mud, damp grass, ...) Sand drive on tarmac roads but it allows you This mode, when moving off, allows This mode allows little spin on the two driving to drive on other less passable terrain considerable spin on the wheel with the least wheels at the same time to allow the vehicle to occasionally. grip to optimise clearing of the mud and regain move forward and limit the risks of getting stuck However, it does not permit off-road grip. At the same time, the wheel with the most in the sand. driving such as: grip is controlled in such a way as to pass as (mode active up to 75 mph (120 km/h)) - crossing and driving on terrain much torque as possible. which could damage the underbody When moving, the system optimises wheel spin F Place the dial in this position. or strip away components (fuel to respond to the driver’s requirements as fully pipe, fuel cooler...) due to obstacles as possible. or stones in particular, - driving on terrain with steep (mode active up to 50 mph (80 km/h)) Do not use the other modes on sand as the gradients and poor grip, vehicle may become stuck. - crossing a stream. F Place the dial in this position.
144 Safety Active City Brake Active City Brake is a driving assistance Principle Conditions for activation system that aims to avoid a frontal collision or reduce the speed of an impact if the driver Active City Brake only operates if the following does not react sufficiently (inadequate brake conditions are met: application). ● ignition on, ● the vehicle is in a forward gear, ● speed is between about 3 and 18 mph (5 and 30 km/h), This system is designed to improve driving safety. ● the braking assistance systems (ABS, It remains the driver’s responsibility to EBFD, emergency braking assistance) are continuously monitor the state of the traffic and not faulty, to assess the distances and relative speeds of ● the trajectory control systems (ASR, DSC) other vehicles. are not deactivated or faulty, Active City Brake can in no circumstances replace Using a laser sensor located at the top of the ● the vehicle is not in a tight corner, the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. windscreen, this system detects a vehicle ● the system has not been triggered during running in the same direction or stationary the previous 10 seconds. ahead of your vehicle. 7 When necessary, the vehicle’s braking system Never look at the laser sensor through is operated automatically to avoid a collision an optical instrument (magnifying glass, with the vehicle ahead. microscope...) at a distance of less than 10 centimetres: risk of eye injury. Automatic braking occurs later than if done by the driver, so as to intervene only when there is a high risk of collision.
145 Safety
Operation When your vehicle is too close to or The triggering of the system may cause approaches the vehicle ahead too quickly the the engine to stall, unless the driver system automatically applies the brakes to depresses the clutch pedal quickly avoid a collision. enough during automatic braking. You are then alerted by the display of a message. The brake lamps on your vehicle come on to warn other road users. During automatic braking, the driver can always obtain a higher rate of The collision can be avoided automatically if the deceleration than that controlled by the difference in speed between your vehicle and the system, by pressing firmly on the brake vehicle ahead does not exceed 9 mph (15 km/h). pedal. Above this threshold, the system will do what is possible to avoid or reduce the accident by lowering the speed of impact.
The automatic braking may bring the vehicle to After an impact, the system is a complete stop if the situation requires it. automatically put out of service: it no In this case, the vehicle is held stationary longer operates. temporarily (for about 1.5 seconds) to allow You must go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a the driver to take back control by pressing the qualified workshop to have the system brake pedal. made operational again.
146 Safety
Deactivation Operating limits The system is deactivated in the vehicle With the touch screen The system only detects vehicles that are configuration menu, accessible with the ignition on. stationary or moving in the same direction as Its state is memorised when the ignition is switched your vehicle. off.
It does not detect small vehicles (bicycles, motorcycles), pedestrians or When the system is deactivated, a animals, nor non-reflective stationary message is displayed every time the objects. ignition is switched on, to warn you.
The system is not triggered or is interrupted if the driver: - accelerates strongly F Press the "MENU" button. - or turns the steering wheel suddenly F Select the "Driving" menu. (avoiding manoeuvre). 7 F In the secondary page, select "Vehicle settings". F Select the "Driving assistance" tab. F Check or uncheck the "Auto emergency braking" box to activate or deactivate the system. F Confirm.
147 Safety
Operating faults Sensor fault System fault In difficult weather conditions (very The operation of the laser sensor may suffer In the event of a malfunction of the system, you heavy rain, snow, fog, hail...), braking interference from accumulations of dirt or are warned by an audible signal and the display distances increase, which can reduce misting of the windscreen. In this case you are of the message " the ability of the system to avoid a Automatic braking system warned by the display of a message. ". collision. fault Use the windscreen demisting and regularly Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT The driver must therefore remain clean the area of the windscreen in front of the dealer or a qualified workshop. particularly vigilant. sensor.
Do not stick or otherwise fix any object on In the event of an impact to the the windscreen in front of the sensor. Never leave accumulations of snow or windscreen at the sensor, deactivate any object projecting above the bonnet the system and contact a PEUGEOT or in front of the roof: this might fall into dealer or a qualified workshop to have the field of vision of the sensor and your windscreen replaced. generate a detection.
Never try to remove, adjust or test the sensor. Only a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop is able to work on the system.
When towing a trailer or when the vehicle is being towed, the system must be deactivated.
148 Safety Seat belts Front seat belts
Fastening Height adjustment F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the F To lower the attachment point, squeeze the 7 buckle. control A and slide it downwards. F Check that the seat belt is fastened F To raise the attachment point, slide the The front seat belts are fitted with a correctly by pulling the strap. control A upwards. pretensioning and force limiting system. This system improves safety in the front seats in the event of a front or side impact. Depending on the severity of the impact, the Unfastening pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat F Press the red button on the buckle. belts against the body of the occupants. F Guide the seat belt as it reels in. The pretensioning seat belts are active when the ignition is on. The force limiter reduces the pressure of the seat belt on the chest of the occupant, so improving their protection.
149 Safety
Rear seat belts
Seat belt not fastened / unfastened warning lamp in the instrument panel When the ignition is switched on, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel. It remains on for a certain time if the front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. After this time, the warning lamp goes off if the driver’s seat belt is fastened. From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) this warning lamp flashes for 2 minutes if the driver The rear seats are each fitted with a three-point and/or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. seat belt, accompanied by an audible signal of increasing volume. Once these 2 minutes have elapsed, this warning lamp remains on until the Fastening Unfastening driver and/or the front passenger fastens their F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in F Press the red button on the buckle. seat belt. the buckle. F Guide the seat belt as it reels in. F Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling the strap.
150 Safety
Advice Recommendations for children The driver must ensure that passengers use In order to be effective, a seat belt must: Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is the seat belts correctly and that they are all - be tightened as close to the body as less than 12 years old or shorter than one fastened before setting off. possible, and a half metres. Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, - be pulled in front of you with a smooth Never use the same seat belt to secure more always fasten your seat belt, even for short movement, checking that it does not than one person. journeys. twist, Never allow a child to travel on your lap. Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as - be used to restrain only one person, For more information on child seats, refer to they will not fulfil their role fully. - not bear any trace of cuts or fraying, the corresponding section. The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel - not be converted or modified to avoid permitting automatic adjustment of the affecting its performance. length of the strap to your size. The seat belt In accordance with current safety is stowed automatically when not in use. regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle’s Before and after use, ensure that the seat seat belts, go to a qualified workshop with belt is reeled in correctly. the skills and equipment needed, which a In the event of an impact The lower part of the strap must be PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. Depending on the nature and positioned as low as possible on the pelvis. Have your seat belts checked regularly by a seriousness of the impact, the The upper part must be positioned in the PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, pretensioning device may be deployed 7 hollow of the shoulder. particularly if the straps show signs of before and independently of the airbags. The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic damage. Deployment of the pretensioners is locking device which comes into operation in Clean the seat belt straps with soapy accompanied by a slight discharge of the event of a collision, emergency braking water or a textile cleaning product, sold by harmless smoke and a noise, due to the or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release PEUGEOT dealers. activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge the device by pulling the strap firmly and After folding or moving a seat or rear bench incorporated in the system. then releasing it so that it reels in slightly. seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes and reeled in correctly. on. Following an impact, have the seat belts system checked, and if necessary replaced, by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
151 Safety Airbags General information Front airbags System designed to contribute towards improving the safety of the occupants (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of violent collisions. The airbags supplement the action of the seat belts fitted with force limiters (all except the centre rear passenger belt). If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors record and analyse the front and side impacts sustained in the impact detection zones: - in the case of a serious impact, the airbags are deployed instantly and contribute Impact detection zones System which protects the driver and front towards better protection of the occupants passenger in the event of a serious front A. Front impact zone. of the vehicle (with the exception of the impact, in order to limit the risk of injury to the B. Side impact zone. rear centre passenger); immediately after head and thorax. the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so The driver’s airbag is fitted in the centre of the that they do not hinder visibility or the exit steering wheel; the front passenger’s airbag is of the occupants, Deployment of one or more of the - in the case of a minor or rear impact or in fitted in the dashboard above the glove box. airbags is accompanied by a slight certain roll-over conditions, the airbags may not be deployed; the seat belt emission of smoke and a noise, due Deployment to the activation of the pyrotechnic alone contributes towards ensuring your The airbags are deployed, except the passenger’s cartridge incorporated in the system. protection in these situations. front airbag if it has been deactivated, in the event This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive of a serious front impact to all or part of the front individuals may experience slight The airbags do not operate when the impact zone A, in the longitudinal centreline of the irritation. ignition is switched off. vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the The noise of detonation associated with This equipment will only deploy once. front to the rear of the vehicle. the deployment of one or more airbags If a second impact occurs (during the The front airbag inflates between the thorax and may result in a slight loss of hearing for same or a subsequent accident), the head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the a short time. airbag will not be deployed again. steering wheel, driver’s side, and the dashboard, passenger’s side to cushion their forward movement. 152 Safety
To assure your child’s safety, you must deactivate the passenger’s front airbag when you install a rearward facing child seat on the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the child risks being seriously injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.
Operating fault Deactivation Reactivation If this warning lamp comes on in the Only the passenger’s front airbag can be When you remove the rearward facing child instrument panel, you must contact deactivated. seat, with the ignition on, turn the switch to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified F With the ignition off, insert the key into the "ON" position to reactivate the airbag and workshop without delay to have the the passenger airbag deactivation switch. so assure the safety of your front passenger in system checked. The airbags may no longer be 7 F Turn it to the "OFF" position, the event of an impact. deployed in the event of a serious impact. F Remove the key keeping the switch in the new position.
When the ignition is on, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel while the airbag is deactivated.
153 Safety
Lateral airbags Deployment The curtain airbag is deployed at the same time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle. The curtain airbag inflates between the front or rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.
System which protects the driver and front Impact detection zones Operating fault passenger in the event of a serious side impact A. Front impact zone. If this warning lamp comes on in the in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest, B. Side impact zone. instrument panel, you must contact between the hip and the shoulder. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest workshop to have the system checked. The frame, door side. airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact. Deployment Curtain airbags A lateral airbag is deployed unilaterally in the System which contributes towards improving event of a serious side impact applied to all or the protection of the driver and passengers In the event of a minor impact or bump part of the side impact zone , perpendicular B (with the exception of the rear centre on the side of the vehicle or if the to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a passenger) in the event of a serious side vehicle rolls over, the airbag may not be horizontal plane and directed from the outside impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the deployed. towards the inside of the vehicle. side of the head. In the event of a rear or front collision, The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and the airbag is not deployed. shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle the upper passenger compartment area. and the corresponding door trim panel. 154 Safety
Advice For the airbags to be fully Even if all of the precautions mentioned Lateral airbags are observed, a risk of injury or of minor effective, observe the safety Use only approved covers on the seats, burns to the head, chest or arms when an recommendations below: compatible with the deployment the lateral airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The Sit in a normal upright position. airbags. For information on the range of seat bag inflates almost instantly (within a few Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt. covers suitable for your vehicle, you can milliseconds) then deflates within the same Do not leave anything between the contact a PEUGEOT dealer. time discharging the hot gas via openings occupants and the airbags (a child, pet, For more information on accessories, refer provided for this purpose. object...), nor fix or attach anything close to to the corresponding section. the inflation trajectory of the airbags; this Do not fix or attach anything to the seat could cause injuries during their deployment. backs (clothing...). This could cause injury Never modify the original definition of your to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is vehicle, particularly in the area directly Front airbags deployed. around the airbags. Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its Do not sit with the upper part of the body any After an accident or if the vehicle has been spokes or resting your hands on the centre nearer to the door than necessary. stolen or broken into, have the airbag part of the wheel. systems checked. Passengers must not place their feet on the 7 All work on the airbag system must be dashboard. carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags qualified workshop. can cause burns or the risk of injury from a Curtain airbags cigarette or pipe. Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or could cause injury to the head if the curtain hit it violently. airbag is deployed. Do not fit or attach anything to the steering If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the wheel or dashboard, this could cause grab handles installed on the roof, they play injuries with deployment of the airbags. a part in securing the curtain airbags.
155 Child safety Carrying children Although one of PEUGEOT's main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children At the rear also depends on you. Rearward facing General points PEUGEOT recommends that children When a rearward facing child seat is installed For maximum safety, please observe the should travel in the outer rear seats of on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's following recommendations: your vehicle: front seat forward and straighten the backrest - in accordance with European regulations, - "rearward facing" up to the age of 3, so that the rearward facing child seat does not all children under the age of 12 or less - "forward facing" over the age of 3. touch the vehicle's front seat. than one and a half metres tall must Remove and stow the head restraint before travel in approved child seats suited to installing a child seat with backrest on a their weight, on seats fitted with a seat passenger seat. belt or ISOFIX mountings*, Refit the head restraint once the child seat has - statistically, the safest seats in your been removed. vehicle for carrying children are the rear seats, Forward facing - a child weighing less than 9 kg must travel in the rearward facing position When a forward facing child seat is installed both in the front and in the rear. on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's front seat forward and straighten the backrest so that the legs of the child in the forward facing child seat do not touch the vehicle's front seat.
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly tensioned. For child seats with a support leg, ensure that this is in firm contact with the floor. If necessary, adjust the front * T he regulations on carrying children are seat of the vehicle. specific to each country. Refer to the legislation in force in your country. 156 Child safety In the front*
Rearward facing Forward facing Passenger seat adjusted to the intermediate longitudinal and highest position. When a rearward-facing child seat is installed When a forward-facing child seat is installed on on the front passenger seat, adjust the the front passenger seat, adjust the vehicle's seat to: seat to: - the intermediate longitudinal position, with - the intermediate longitudinal position, with the backrest straightened for a seat without the backrest straightened for a seat without height adjuster, height adjuster, 8 - the intermediate longitudinal position - the intermediate longitudinal position and highest position, with the backrest and highest position, with the backrest straightened for a seat with height adjuster. straightened for a seat with height adjuster. The passenger airbag must be deactivated. The passenger's airbag must remain activated. Ensure that the seat belt is correctly Otherwise, the child would risk being tensioned. seriously injured or killed if the airbag were For child seats with a support leg, deployed. ensure that this is in steady contact with the floor. If not, adjust the passenger seat. * Refer to the legislation in your country before installing your child in this seating position. 157 Child safety
Deactivating the passenger's The warning label present on both sides of the front airbag passenger's sun visor repeats this advice. In line with current legislation, the following tables contain this warning in all of the languages required. Passenger airbag OFF Never install a rearward facing child restraint system on a seat protected by an active front airbag. This could cause the death of the child or serious injury.
Only the passenger's front airbag can be deactivated. F With the ignition off, introduce the key into the passenger airbag deactivation switch. F Turn it to the "OFF" position. F Remove the key, leaving the switch in this position.
When the ignition is on, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and stays on while the airbag is deactivated.
158 Child safety
AR
BG НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това може да причини СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето. CS NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí nebezpečí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ. DA Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT KVÆSTET eller DRÆBT. DE Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der Fahrtrichtung, das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden. EL Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου, σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ EN NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur ES NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño. ET Ärge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage "seljaga sõidusuunas" lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele, mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD. Turvapadja avanemine võib last TÕSISELT või ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada. FI ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN. FR NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l’arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE frontal ACTIVÉ. Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l’ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT 8 HR NIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta. HU SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez a gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja. IT NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino. LT NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonės su atgal atgręžtu vaiku ant sėdynės, kuri saugoma VEIKIANČIOS priekinės ORO PAGALVĖS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS. LV NEKAD NEuzstādiet uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasažiera sēdvietā, kurā ir AKTIVIZĒTS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS GAISA SPILVENS. Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
159 Child safety
MT Qatt m’ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f’siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista’ tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla
NL Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN NO Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE, BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET. PL NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji "tyłem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZKĘ POWIETRZNĄ w stanie AKTYWNYM. Może to doprowadzić do ŚMIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodować u niego POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA CIAŁA.
PT NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO. Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA. RO Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA. RU ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье, защищенном ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем. Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
SK NIKDY neinštalujte detské zádržné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM čelným AIRBAGOM. Mohlo by dôjsť k SMRTEĽNÉMU alebo VÁŽNEMU PORANENIU DIEŤAŤA. SL NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE. SR NIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedištu zaštićenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer mogu nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA. SV Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att DÖDAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT. TR KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTİF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
160 Child safety Child seats recommended by PEUGEOT PEUGEOT offers a range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt.
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
L1 "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" Installed in the rearward facing position.
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L4 8 "KLIPPAN Optima" From 22 kg (approximately 6 years), the booster is used on its own.
L5 "RÖMER KIDFIX" Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings. The child is restrained by the seat belt.
161 Child safety Locations for child seats secured with the seat belt In accordance with the European regulation, this table indicates the options for the installation of child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved (a) in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.
Weight of the child / indicative age
Less than 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg Seat (groups 0 (b) and 0+) (group 1) (group 2) (group 3) Up to 1 year approx From 1 to 3 years approx From 3 to 6 years approx From 6 to 10 years approx
Front passenger seat (c)
- with height adjustment U(R) U(R) U(R) U(R)
- without height adjustment U U U U
Outer rear seats (d) U U U U
Centre rear seat X X X X
162 Child safety
(a) Universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles using the seat belt. Remove and stow the head restraint (b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front before installing a child seat on a passenger seat. passenger seat. (c) Consult the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat. Refit the head restraint once the child (d) T o install a child seat on a rear seat, rearward facing or forward facing, move the front seat seat has been removed. forward, then straighten the backrest to allow enough space for the child seat and the child's legs. U: seat suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using the seat belt and universally approved rearward facing and/or forward facing. U(R): as for U, the vehicle seat must be adjusted to the highest position and the intermediate longitudinal position. X: seating position not suitable for the installation of a child seat of the weight group indicated.
8
163 Child safety
Advice
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a For optimum installation of the forward facing Installing a booster seat vehicle compromises the child's protection in child seat, ensure that the back of the child The chest part of the seat belt must be the event of an accident. seat is as close as possible to the backrest positioned on the child's shoulder without Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt of the vehicle's seat, in contact if possible. touching the neck. buckle under the child seat, as this could You must remove the head restraint before Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt destabilise it. installing a child seat with backrest to a passes correctly over the child's thighs. Remember to fasten the seat belts or the passenger seat. PEUGEOT recommends the use of a booster child seat harnesses keeping the slack Ensure that the head restraint is stored or seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt relative to the child's body to a minimum, attached securely to prevent it from being guide at shoulder level. even for short journeys. thrown around the vehicle in the event of When installing a child seat using the seat sharp braking. Refit the head restraint when belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened the child seat is removed. correctly on the child seat and that it secures the child seat firmly on the seat of your vehicle. If your passenger seat is adjustable, Children at the front As a safety precaution, do not leave: move it forwards if necessary. - a child or children alone and The legislation on carrying children on the At rear seating positions, always leave unsupervised in a vehicle, front passenger seat is specific to each sufficient space between the front seat and: - a child or an animal in a vehicle which country. Refer to the legislation in force in - a rearward facing child seat, is exposed to the sun, with the windows your country. - the child's feet for a child seat fitted closed, Deactivate the passenger's front airbag forward facing. - the keys within reach of children inside when a rearward facing child seat is installed To do this, move the front seat forwards the vehicle. on the front passenger seat. and, if necessary, move its backrest into the To prevent accidental opening of the doors Otherwise, the child risks being seriously upright position. and rear windows, use the child lock. injured or killed if the airbag is deployed. Take care not to open the rear windows by more than one third. To protect young children from the rays of the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
164 Child safety "ISOFIX" mountings Your vehicle has been approved in accordance The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two with the latest ISOFIX regulation. latches which are secured on the two rings A. The seats, represented below, are fitted with Some seats also have an upper strap, known regulation ISOFIX mountings: as the TOP TETHER, which is attached to ring B.
To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER: - remove and stow the head restraint before installing the child seat in this seating position (refit it once the child seat has been removed), - a ring B behind the seat for fixing the upper - pass the strap of the child seat over the top strap, referred to as the TOP TETHER. of the seat backrest, centred between the apertures for the head restraint rods, - fix the hook of the upper strap to the ring B, The TOP TETHER is used to secure the - tighten the upper strap. upper strap of child seats that have one. This arrangement limits the forward tipping of the child seat in the event of a front impact. The incorrect installation of a child seat This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast, 8 in a vehicle compromises the child's reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your protection in the event of an accident. vehicle. Follow the instructions for fitting child seats contained in the installation guide When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to the left supplied with the child seat. hand rear seat, before fitting the seat, first There are three rings for each seat: move the centre rear seat belt towards the - two rings A, located between the vehicle For information on the possibilities for middle of the vehicle, so as to avoid the seat seat back and cushion, indicated by a installing ISOFIX child seats in your interfering with the operation of the seat belt. marking, vehicle, refer to the summary table.
165 Child safety ISOFIX child seats recommended by PEUGEOT
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its Baby-Safe Plus ISOFIX base" (size category: E)
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX base which is attached to the rings A. The base has a support leg, adjustable for height, which sits on the vehicle's floor. This seat can be secured with a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used and attached to the vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt.
Baby P2C Midi and its ISOFIX base (size categories: D, C, A, B, B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX base which is attached to the rings A. The base has a support leg, adjustable for height, which sits on the vehicle's floor. This child seat can also be used "forward facing". This seat can not be secured with a seat belt. We recommend that you use the seat in the "rearward facing" position up to the age of 3 years.
Follow the instructions for fitting child seats contained in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.
166 Child safety
"RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX" (size category: B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed forward facing. Attached to the rings A and the upper ring B, referred to as the TOP TETHER, using an upper strap. Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying down. This child seat can also be used on seats not equipped with ISOFIX mountings. In this case, it must be secured to the seat using the three-point seat belt.
FAIR G 0/1 S and its RWF A ISOFIX base (size category C)
Group 0+ and 1: from birth to 18 kg
Installed in the rearward facing position using its ISOFIX base, which is attached to the rings A. 6 positions of inclination of the shell. Use the RWF type A ISOFIX base. This child seat can also be used in a forward facing position 8 on seating positions not equipped with ISOFIX mountings. In this case the shell of the child seat must be attached to the vehicle seat using the three-point seat belt.
Follow the instructions for fitting child seats contained in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.
167 Child safety
Locations for child seats In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings. In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
Weight of the child / indicative age
Less than 10 kg Less than 10 kg (group 0) (group 0) From 9 to 18 kg (group 1) Less than 13 kg Up to approx. From approx. 1 to 3 years (group 0+) 6 months Up to approx. 1 year
Type of ISOFIX child seat Infant car seat rearward facing rearward facing forward facing
ISOFIX size category FGCDECDAB B1
Front passenger seat Not ISOFIX
IUF Outer rear seats X IL-SU* IL-SU IL-SU* IL-SU IL-SU
Centre rear seat Not ISOFIX
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Universal seat, Forward facing secured using the Remove and stow the head restraint upper strap. before installing a child seat on a IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Semi-Universal seat either: passenger seat. - rearward facing fitted with an upper strap or a support leg, Refit the head restraint once the child - forward facing fitted with a support leg, seat has been removed. - an infant car seat fitted with an upper strap or a support leg. For advice on securing the upper strap, refer to the "ISOFIX mountings" section. X: seat not suitable for the installation of a child seat for the weight group indicated.
* Vehicle seat in a particular position: move the seats in front of the child forward. 168 Child safety Electric child lock Remote control system to prevent opening of the rear doors using their interior controls.
Switching off F With the ignition on, press this button again. The indicator lamp in the button goes off, accompanied by a message to confirm that the child lock is off. This indicator lamp remains off while the child lock is switched off.
Any other status of the indicator lamp indicates a fault with the electric child Switching on lock. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer F With the ignition on, press this button. or a qualified workshop. The indicator lamp in the button comes on, accompanied by a message to confirm that the child lock is on. This system is independent and in no This indicator lamp remains on until the child circumstances does it take the place of 8 lock is switched off. the central locking control. It is still possible to open the doors from the Check the status of the child lock each outside and operate the rear electric windows time you switch on the ignition. from the driver's control panel. Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.
169 Practical information Fuel tank Fuel tank capacity: approximately 50 litres. Low fuel level Refuelling When the fuel tank minimum level is reached this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel. There remains approximately 5 litres of fuel in the tank. When the warning lamp flashes there is very little fuel remaining in the tank. You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel. For more information on running out of fuel (Diesel), refer to the corresponding section.
1. Open the fuel filler flap. To fill the tank safely: The key cannot be removed from the 2. Remove the filler cap. F the engine must be switched off, lock until the cap is refitted. 3. Hook the filler cap. F open the fuel filler flap by pressing at its Removing the filler cap may cause an rear 1, inrush of air. This vacuum is perfectly F insert the key in the cap, then turn it to the normal and results from the sealing of left 2, the system. A self-adhesive label on the inner face of the F remove the cap and hook it onto the clip filler flap reminds you of the type of fuel to use, located on the inside of the flap 3, depending on your engine. F fill the tank, but do not continue after the Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres to 3rd cut-off of the pump; this could cause be registered by the fuel gauge. malfunctions. With Stop & Start, never refuel with the system in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition with the key.
170 Practical information
Fuel supply cut-off When you have filled the tank: Your vehicle is fitted with a safety system F put the cap back in place, that cuts off the supply of fuel in the event of F turn the key to the right, then remove it an impact. from the cap, F close the flap.
If you have put in the wrong fuel for the engine of your vehicle, you must have the fuel tank drained and filled with the correct fuel before starting the engine. 9
171 Practical information Misfuel prevention (Diesel)* Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of engine damage that can result from filling with the wrong fuel. Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed.
Operation It remains possible to use a fuel can to Travelling abroad fill the tank. When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may In order to ensure a good flow of fuel, fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes be different in other countries, the do not place the nozzle of the fuel can into contact with the flap. The system remains presence of the misfuel prevention in direct contact with the flap of the closed and prevents filling. device may make refuelling impossible. misfuel prevention device and pour Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with slowly. filler nozzle. misfuel protection, so before travelling abroad, we recommend that you check with the PEUGEOT dealer network, whether your vehicle is suitable for the fuel pumps in the country in which you intend to travel.
* Depending on the country of sale. 172 Practical information
Fuel used for petrol Fuel used for Diesel engines engines The petrol engines are compatible with The Diesel engines are compatible with The use of B20 or B30 fuel meeting standard E10 bio-petrol (containing 10 % ethanol), biofuels available at the pumps which meet EN16709 is possible in your Diesel engines. conforming to European standards EN 228 and current and future European standards: However, this use, even occasional, requires EN 15376. - Diesel fuel that meets standard EN 590 strict application of the special servicing E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol) mixed with a biofuel that meets standard conditions referred to as "Arduous conditions". are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed EN 14214, For more information, contact a PEUGEOT for the use of this type of fuel (BioFlex - Diesel fuel that meets standard EN16734 dealer or a qualified workshop. vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must mixed with a biofuel that meets standard The use of any other type of (bio)fuel comply with European standard EN 15293. EN14214 (possibly containing up to 10 % (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, Fatty Acid Methyl Ester), domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of - Paraffinic Diesel fuel that meets standard damage to the engine and fuel system). EN15940 mixed with a biofuel that meets Only the use of Diesel fuel additives that meet standard EN14214 (possibly containing up the standard B715000 is authorised. to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester). 9
173 Practical information Running out of fuel (Diesel) On vehicle fitted with HDi engines, the fuel 1.6 litre BlueHDi engines 1.6 litre e-HDi 92 engine system must be primed if you run out of fuel. For versions with a manual priming pump, F Add at least 5 litres of Diesel fuel to the F Add at least 5 litres of Diesel fuel to the refer to the drawing of the corresponding tank. tank. underbonnet view. F Switch the ignition on (without starting the F Open the bonnet. If the tank on your vehicle is fitted with engine). F If necessary, unclip the styling cover for a misfuel prevention device, refer to the F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the access to the priming pump. corresponding section. ignition. F Squeeze and release the priming pump F Repeat the operation 10 times. repeatedly until resistance is felt (there F Operate the starter motor to start the may be resistance at the first press). engine. F Operate the starter to start the engine (if the engine does not start at the first attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying again). If the engine does not start first time, F If the engine does not start after a don't keep trying. Start the procedure few attempts, operate the priming pump again from the beginning. again then start the engine. F Refit the styling cover and clip it in place. F Close the bonnet.
174 Practical information AdBlue® and SCR system for BlueHDi Diesel engines To assure respect for the environment and The AdBlue® is held in a special tank with Once the AdBlue® tank is empty, a conformity with the new Euro 6 emissions a capacity of about 17 litres: this provides system required by regulations prevents standard, without adversely affecting the a driving range of about 12 500 miles starting of the engine. performance or fuel consumption of Diesel (20 000 km), after which an alert is triggered If the SCR is faulty, the level of engines, PEUGEOT has taken the decision to warning you when the reserve remaining is emissions from your vehicle will no equip its vehicles with an effective system that enough for just 1 500 miles (2 400 km). longer meet the Euro 6 standard: your associates SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) vehicle becomes polluting. with a particle filter (FAP) for the treatment of In the event of a confirmed fault exhaust gases. with the SCR system, you must go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified During each scheduled service of your vehicle workshop as soon as possible: after a by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, running distance of 650 miles ® Presentation of the SCR system the AdBlue tank is refilled in order to allow (1 100 km), a system will be triggered normal operation of the SCR system. Using a fluid called AdBlue® containing urea, automatically to prevent engine starting. a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of nitrous oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and water, which are harmless to health and the environment. If the estimated mileage between two services is greater than 12 500 miles (20 000 km), we recommend that you go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the necessary 9 top-up carried out.
175 Practical information
Range indicators In the event of the risk of non-starting related to a lack of AdBlue® Once the AdBlue® tank is on reserve or after Range greater than 1 500 miles (2 400 km) The engine start prevention system detection of a fault with the SCR emissions When the ignition is switched on, no required by regulations is activated control system, when the ignition is switched information on range is displayed automatically automatically once the AdBlue® tank is on, an indicator displays an estimate of the in the instrument panel. empty. distance that can be covered, the range, before engine starting is prevented. In the event of simultaneous system fault and low AdBlue® level, the shortest range figure is the one displayed.
Pressing this button displays the driving range temporarily. Above 3 000 miles (5 000 km), the value is not specified.
176 Practical information
Remaining range between 350 and 1500 miles (600 and 2 400 km) Remaining range between 0 and 350 miles (0 and 600 km) Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue®
When switching on the ignition, this warning When switching on the ignition, this warning When switching on the ignition, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message (e.g.: "Top signal and the display of a message (e.g. "Top signal and the display of the message "Top up up emissions additive: Starting prevented in up emissions additive: Starting prevented in emissions additive: Starting prevented". 900 miles") indicating the remaining range 350 miles") indicating the remaining range The AdBlue® tank is empty: the system required expressed in miles or kilometres. expressed in miles or kilometres. by regulations prevents engine starting. When driving, the message is displayed every When driving, the message is displayed every 200 miles (300 km) until the fluid has been 30 seconds until the fluid has been topped-up. topped-up. Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the AdBlue® topped-up. workshop to have the AdBlue® topped-up. You can also top-up the tank yourself. You can also top-up the tank yourself. Otherwise you will not be able to restart your To be able to start the engine, For more information on topping-up the engine. we recommend that you call on a AdBlue®, refer to the corresponding section. 9 PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for the top-up required. If you carry out the top-up yourself, it is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of For more information on topping-up AdBlue® to the tank. the AdBlue®, refer to the corresponding section.
177 Practical information
In the event of a fault with the SCR emissions control system
In the event of the detection During an authorised driving phase (between A system that prevents engine starting of a fault 650 miles and 0 miles) (1 100 km and 0 km) is activated automatically from 650 miles (1 100 km) after confirmation of a fault with the SCR emissions control system. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible. These warning lamps comes on, accompanied If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed by an audible signal and the display of the (after 30 miles (50 km) covered with the message "Emissions fault". permanent display of the message signalling The alert is triggered when driving when the a fault), these warning lamps come on, fault is detected for the first time, then when accompanied by an audible signal and the switching on the ignition for subsequent display of a message (e.g.: "Emissions fault: journeys, while the fault persists. Starting prevented in 150 miles") indicating the remaining range expressed in miles or kilometres. While driving, the message is displayed every 30 seconds while the fault with the SCR system If it is a temporary fault, the alert persists. disappears during the next journey, The alert is repeated when switching on the after self-diagnosis of the SCR system. ignition. You should go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible. Otherwise, you will not be able to restart your engine.
178 Practical information
Starting prevented Freezing of the AdBlue®
AdBlue® freezes at temperatures below around -11°C. The SCR system includes a heater for the AdBlue® tank, allowing you to Every time the ignition is switched on, these continue driving in very cold conditions. warning lamps come on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of the message "Emissions fault: Starting prevented".
You have exceeded the authorised driving limit: the starting prevention system inhibits engine starting.
To be able to start the engine, you must call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. 9
179 Practical information
Topping-up the AdBlue® Filling the AdBlue® tank is an operation Precautions in use Use only AdBlue® fluid that meets the included in every routine service on your ISO 22241 standard. AdBlue® is a urea-based solution. This liquid is vehicle by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified non-flammable, colourless and odourless (kept Never dilute AdBlue® with water. workshop. in a cool area). Never pour AdBlue® into the Diesel fuel Nevertheless, given the capacity of the tank, it In the event of contact with the skin, wash tank. may be necessary to top-up the fluid between the affected area with soap and water. In the services, more particularly if an alert (warning event of contact with the eyes, wash (irrigate) lamps and a message) signals the requirement. the eyes with large amounts of water or with You can go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The supply in a non-drip bottle simplifies an eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes. workshop. topping-up. You can obtain 1.89 litre (half a US If a burning sensation or irritation persists, get If you envisage topping-up yourself, please gallon) bottles from a PEUGEOT dealer or a medical attention. read the following warnings carefully. qualified workshop. If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth with clean water and then drink plenty of water. In certain conditions (high ambient temperature, for example), the risk of release of ammonia Never top-up from an AdBlue® cannot be excluded: do not inhale the fluid. dispenser reserved for heavy goods Ammonia vapour has an irritant effect on vehicles. mucous membranes (eyes, nose and throat).
Keep AdBlue® out of the reach of children, in its original bottle. Never transfer AdBlue® to another container: it would lose its purity.
180 Practical information
Recommendations on storage Procedure AdBlue® freezes at about -11°C and Before topping-up, ensure that the vehicle is deteriorates above 25°C. It is recommended parked on a flat and level surface. that bottles be stored in a cool area and In wintry conditions, ensure that the protected from direct sunlight. temperature of the vehicle is above -11°C. Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept Otherwise the AdBlue® may be frozen and for at least a year. so cannot be poured into its tank. Park your If the additive has frozen, it can be used once it vehicle in a warmer area for a few hours to has completely thawed out. allow the top-up to be carried out.
Never store bottles of AdBlue® in your vehicle. F Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
Do not dispose of AdBlue® bottles in the household waste. Place them in a container provided for this purpose or take them to your dealer. 9 Access F For access to the AdBlue® tank, raise the boot carpet then, depending on equipment, lift out the spare wheel and/or the storage box.
181 Practical information
Filling Closing F Pour the contents of the bottle into your F Refit the blue cap to the tank and turn it vehicle's AdBlue® tank. a 6th of a turn clockwise, to its stop. F F Wipe away any spillage around the tank Refit the black cap and turn it a quarter of filler using a damp cloth. a turn clockwise without pressing. Ensure that the indicator on the cap lines up with Opening the indicator on the support. F Without pressing, turn the black cap a F Depending on equipment, return the spare quarter turn anti-clockwise and lift it off. wheel and/or the storage box to the bottom of the boot. F Refit the boot carpet and close the tailgate.
F Turn the blue cap a 6th of a turn anti- clockwise. F Lift off the cap. Important: if your vehicle's AdBlue® tank is completely empty - which is confirmed by the alert messages and the impossibility of starting the engine, you must add at least 3.8 litres Important: in the event of a top-up (so two 1.89 litre bottles). after a breakdown because of a lack of AdBlue®, signalled by the message "Top up emissions additive: Starting prevented", you must wait around 5 minutes before switching on the ignition, If any fluid is split or splashed, wash without opening the driver's door, immediately with cold water or wipe with locking the vehicle or introducing the a damp cloth. key into the ignition switch. If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off Switch on the ignition, then, after using a sponge and hot water. 10 seconds, start the engine.
182 Practical information Temporary puncture repair kit Repair kit with separate Access to the kit Composition of the kit sealant cartridge (depending on version) This kit comprises a compressor and a sealant cartridge. It allows the temporary repair of a tyre. You are then able to go to the nearest garage. It can be used for repairing most punctures on the tread or shoulder of the tyre. Its compressor can be used to check and adjust the pressure of the tyre.
This kit is installed in the storage box, under the 1. 12 V compressor, with integral pressure boot floor. gauge. 2. Sealant cartridge, with integral hose. 3. Speed limit sticker.
The vehicle's electric system allows the The speed limit sticker must be secured connection of the compressor for long to the interior of the vehicle in the enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture driver's field of vision, to remind you 9 repair. that a wheel is in temporary use.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving with a tyre repaired using this type of kit.
183 Practical information
Repair procedure
F Switch off the ignition. F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the F Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be F Secure the speed limit sticker inside compressor. repaired, and place it in a clean area. the vehicle. F Connect the pipe from the compressor to F Connect the hose from the sealant the sealant cartridge. cartridge to the valve of the tyre to be F Turn the sealant cartridge and secure it in repaired and tighten firmly. the cut-out provided on the compressor. Avoid removing any foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre.
184 Practical information
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the pressure is not attained, this indicates that the tyre is not repairable; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance.
F Check that the compressor switch is at F Start the compressor by placing the switch Take care, the sealant product is the " " position). at the " " position and leave it running until O I harmful if swallowed and causes F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under the tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bar. irritation to the eyes. the compressor. The sealant product is injected into the tyre Keep this product out of the reach of F Connect the compressor's plug to the under pressure; do not disconnect the pipe children. vehicle's 12 V socket. from the valve during this operation (risk of The use-by date is marked on the F Switch on the ignition. splashing and stains). cartridge. After use, do not discard the cartridge by the roadside, take it to a 9 PEUGEOT dealer or an authorised waste disposal site. Don't forget to obtain a new sealant cartridge, available from a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
185 Practical information
Checking and inflating
F Place the switch in the "O" position. To check and if necessary adjust the tyre F Check that the compressor switch is at F Remove the kit. pressures. the "O" position. F Drive immediately for approximately F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under 3 miles (5 kilometres), at reduced F Remove the valve cap from the tyre and the compressor. speed (between 15 and 35 mph (20 and place it in a clean area. F Connect the compressor's plug to the 60 km/h)), to plug the puncture. F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the vehicle's 12 V socket. F Stop to check the repair and the tyre compressor. F Switch on the ignition. pressure using the kit. F Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten firmly.
186 Practical information
Tyre under-inflation detection After repair of the tyre, the warning lamp will remain on until the system is reinitialised. For more information on under-inflation detection, refer to the corresponding section.
F Start the compressor by placing the switch Should the pressure of one or more at the " " position and adjust the pressure I tyres be adjusted, it is necessary to to the value shown on the vehicle's tyre reinitialise the under-inflation detection pressure label. system. To deflate: press the black button on the For more information on under-inflation compressor pipe, at the valve connector. detection, refer to the corresponding F Once the correct pressure is reached, put section. the switch to the "O" position. F Remove the kit then stow it. 9
187 Practical information
Repair kit with integral sealant cartridge (depending on version) This kit comprises a compressor and a sealant cartridge. It allows the temporary repair of a tyre. You are then able to go to the nearest garage. It can be used for repairing most punctures on the tread or shoulder of the tyre. Its compressor can be used to check and adjust the pressure of the tyre.
Access to the kit
This kit is installed in the storage box, under the List of tools boot floor. All of these tools are specific to your vehicle For more information on towing the vehicle, and can vary according to equipment. Do not refer to the corresponding section. use them for other purposes. 1. 12 V compressor. Contains a sealant cartridge for the temporary repair of a tyre and can also be used for adjusting tyre pressures. 2. Removable towing eye.
188 Practical information
Description of the kit
A. "Sealant" or "Air" position selector. F. Sealant cartridge. The speed limit sticker I must be affixed B. On "I" / off "O" switch. G. White pipe with cap for repair. to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind C. Deflation button. H. Black pipe for inflation. you that a wheel is in temporary use. D. Pressure gauge (in bars and psi). I. Speed limit sticker. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph E. Compartment housing: (80 km/h) when driving with a tyre - a cable with adaptor for 12 V socket, repaired using this type of kit. - various inflation adaptors for accessories, such as balls, bicycle tyres... 9 The vehicle's electric system allows the connection of the compressor for long enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture repair.
189 Practical information
Repair procedure
1. Sealing F Switch off the ignition. F Uncoil the white pipe G fully. F Connect the compressor's electric plug to F F Turn the selector A to the Unscrew the cap from the white pipe. the vehicle's 12 V socket. "sealant" position. F Connect the white pipe to the valve of the F Start the vehicle and leave the engine F Check that the switch B is in tyre to be repaired. running. position "O".
Avoid removing any foreign bodies Take care, this product is harmful if which have penetrated into the tyre. swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes. Keep this product out of the reach of children.
190 Practical information
F Switch on the compressor by moving F Remove the kit and screw the cap back on the switch B to position "I" until the tyre the white pipe. pressure reaches 2.0 bars. Take care to avoid staining your vehicle The sealant is injected into the tyre under with traces of fluid. Keep the kit to hand. pressure; do not disconnect the pipe from F Drive immediately for approximately the valve during this operation (risk of 3 miles (5 kilometres), at reduced splashing). speed (between 15 and 35 mph (20 and 60 km/h)), to plug the puncture. 9 F Stop to check the repair and the tyre pressure using the kit. If after around 5 to 7 minutes the Do not start the compressor before pressure is not attained, this indicates connecting the white pipe to the tyre that the tyre is not repairable; contact valve: the sealant product would be a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified expelled through the pipe. workshop for assistance.
191 Practical information
2. Inflation F Turn the selector A to the F Connect the compressor's electric plug to F Adjust the pressure using the compressor "Air" position. the vehicle's 12 V socket. (to inflate: switch B in position "I"; F Uncoil the black pipe H fully. F Start the vehicle again and leave the to deflate: switch B in position "O" and F Connect the black pipe to the engine running. press button C), in accordance with the valve of the wheel. vehicle's tyre pressure label (located on the left hand door aperture). A loss of pressure indicates that the As soon as possible, go to a PEUGEOT puncture has not been fully plugged; dealer or a qualified workshop. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified You must inform the technician that you workshop for assistance. F have used this kit. After inspection, the Remove and stow the kit. F technician will advise you on whether Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h] the tyre can be repaired or if it must be max) limiting the distance travelled to replaced. approximately 120 miles (200 km).
192 Practical information
Removing the cartridge Checking tyre pressures / inflating accessories
F Stow the black pipe. F Detach the angled base from the white pipe. F Support the compressor vertically. F Unscrew the cartridge from the bottom. You can also use the compressor, without F Connect the compressor's electrical injecting any product, to: connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket. Beware of discharges of fluid. - check or adjust the pressure of your tyres, F Start the vehicle and let the engine run. The expiry date of the fluid is indicated - inflate other accessories (balls, F Adjust the pressure using the compressor on the cartridge. bicycle tyres...). (to inflate: switch B in position "I"; The sealant cartridge is designed for to deflate: switch B in position "O" and single use; even if only partly used, it press button C), according to the vehicle's must be replaced. F Turn the selector A to the tyre pressure label or the accessory's 9 After use, do not discard the cartridge "Air" position. pressure label. into the environment, take it to an F Uncoil the black pipe H fully. F Remove the kit then stow it. authorised waste disposal site or a F Connect the black pipe to the PEUGEOT dealer. valve of the wheel or accessory. Do not forget to obtain a new sealant If necessary, fit one of the adaptors cartridge, available from PEUGEOT supplied with the kit first. dealers or from a qualified workshop.
193 Practical information Changing a wheel Procedure for changing a wheel for the spare wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle. Access to the tools 3. "Bolt cover" tool. For removing the bolt protectors (covers) on alloy wheels. 4. Socket for the security bolts (located in the glove box). For adapting the wheelbrace to the special "security" bolts. 5. Removable towing eye. For more information on the removable towing eye, refer to the corresponding section.
List of tools* All of these tools are specific to your vehicle and can vary according to the level The tools are installed in the boot under the of equipment. Do not use them for other floor. purposes. To gain access to them: 1. Wheelbrace. F open the boot, For removing the wheel trim and removing F lift the floor and remove it, the wheel bolts. F remove the polystyrene spacer, 2. Jack with integral handle. F remove the carrier box containing the tools. For raising the vehicle. * Depending on the country of sale. 194 Practical information
Access to the spare wheel*
Wheel with wheel trim When refitting the wheel, refit the wheel trim starting by placing its cut-out facing the valve and press around its edge with the palm of your hand.
Taking out the wheel F Unscrew the central (coloured) nut. F Raise the spare wheel towards you from the rear. F Take the wheel out of the boot. 9
The spare wheel is installed in the boot under the floor. The spare wheel is a steel wheel or a space- saver wheel, depending on the country of sale. It is secured by a nut A and a screw B. For the nut, proceed as follows. * Depending on the country of sale. 195 Practical information
Putting the wheel back in place F Put the wheel back in its housing. F Unscrew the central (coloured) nut by a few turns then put it in place in the centre of the wheel. F Tighten fully until the central bolt clicks to retain the wheel correctly.
F Put the box back in the centre of the wheel and clip it in place. F Refit the polystyrene storage box to restrain the unit.
196 Practical information
Removing a wheel
Parking the vehicle Immobilise the vehicle where it does not block traffic: the ground must be level, stable and not slippery. Apply the parking brake. Switch off the ignition. With a manual gearbox, engage first gear to block the wheels. With an electronic gearbox, place the gear selector at position R to block the wheels. With an automatic gearbox, place the F Place the foot of the jack 2 on the ground gear selector at position P to block the and ensure that it is directly below the wheels. front A or rear B jacking point provided on Check that the parking brake warning List of operations the underbody, whichever is closest to the lamps in the instrument panel come on. wheel to be changed. The occupants must get out of the F Remove the bolt cover from each of vehicle and wait where they are safe. the bolts using the tool 3 (according to Never go underneath a vehicle raised equipment). using a jack; use an axle stand. F Fit the security socket 4 on the 9 wheelbrace 1 to slacken the security bolt (if fitted). F Slacken the other bolts using the Never use: wheelbrace 1 only. - the jack for any other purpose than raising the vehicle, - a jack other than the one provided by the manufacturer.
197 Practical information
F Extend the jack 2 until it comes into contact F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient F Remove the bolts and store them in a clean with the jacking point A or B used; the space between the wheel and the ground place. contact area A or B on the vehicle must be to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel F Remove the wheel. correctly inserted into the central part of easily. the head of the jack.
Ensure that the jack is stable on a surface that is not slippery or loose and positioned only at the jacking point A or B under the vehicle, ensuring that the contact area on the vehicle is well centred on the head of the jack. Otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle and/or of the jack dropping or slipping - Risk of injury!
198 Practical information
Fitting a wheel
After changing a wheel To store the punctured wheel in the boot correctly, first remove the central cover. When using the "space-saver" type spare wheel, do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Have the tightening of the bolts and the pressure of the spare wheel checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Fitting the "space-saver" workshop without delay. spare wheel Have the punctured wheel repaired If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, and refitted to the vehicle as soon as when tightening the bolts on fitting, it possible. is normal to notice that the washers do not come into contact with the "space- saver" spare wheel. The wheel is secured by the conical shoulder of each bolt (see drawing). When refitting the alloy wheel, ensure 9 that the wheel bolt washers are clean and in good condition.
199 Practical information
List of operations F Put the wheel in place on the hub. F Lower the vehicle fully. F Tighten the security bolt using the F Screw in the bolts fully by hand. F Fold the jack 2 and detach it. wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security F Pre-tighten the security bolt using the socket 4 (if your vehicle has them). wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security F Tighten the other bolts using the socket 4 (if your vehicle has them). wheelbrace 1 only. F Pre-tighten the other bolts using the F Refit the bolt covers on each of the bolts wheelbrace 1 only. (according to equipment). F Store the tools in the carrier box.
200 Practical information Snow chains In wintry conditions, snow chains improve Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the Advice on installation traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle type of wheel fitted to your vehicle: F If you have to fit the chains during a when braking. journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface on the side of the road. F Apply the parking brake and position any The snow chains must be fitted only Original Maximum wheel chocks to prevent movement of your to the front wheels. They must never tyre size link size. vehicle. be fitted to "space-saver" type spare F Fit the chains following the instructions wheels. provided by the manufacturer. 195/65 R15 F Move off gently and drive for a few moments, without exceeding 30 mph 195/60 R16 (50 km/h). 9 mm F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow 205/55 R16 chains are correctly tightened.
205/50 R17 Avoid driving with snow chains on roads that have been cleared of snow, to avoid damaging your vehicle's tyres and the road surface. If your vehicle is fitted with For more information on snow chains, contact a alloy wheels, check that no part of the PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. chain or its fixings is in contact with the wheel rim. 9
Take account of the legislation in force in your country on the use of snow It is strongly recommended that before chains and the maximum running speed you leave, you practise fitting the snow authorised. chains on a level and dry surface.
201 Practical information Changing a bulb The headlamps have polycarbonate Front lamps lenses with a protective coating: F do not clean them using a dry or abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent or solvent product, F use a sponge and soapy water or a pH neutral product, F when using a high pressure washer on persistent marks, do not keep the lance directed towards the lamps or their edges for too long, so as not to damage their protective coating and seals.
1. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps In some weather conditions (e.g. low (light-emitting diodes - LEDs). temperature or humidity), the presence 2. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W). of misting on the internal surface of the 3. Direction indicators (PWY-24W). Changing a bulb should only be done glass of the headlamps and rear lamps 4. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W). after the headlamp has been switched is normal; it disappears after the lamps 5. Front foglamps (with "cornering off for several minutes (risk of serious have been on for a few minutes. lighting" function according to version) burns). (PSX-24W). F Do not touch the bulb directly with your fingers, use a lint-free cloth. It is imperative to use only anti- ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs to avoid damaging the headlamp. Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb with the same type and specification.
202 Practical information
Changing direction indicator Changing dipped beam headlamp bulbs bulbs F Remove the protective cover by pulling on Rapid flashing of the direction indicator Amber coloured bulbs, such as the the tab. warning lamp (right or left) indicates the direction indicators, must be replaced F Disconnect the bulb connector. failure of a bulb on that side. with bulbs of identical specifications F Spread the spring to release the bulb. and colour. F Extract the bulb and change it. When refitting, close the protective cover carefully to preserve the sealing F Turn the bulb holder an eighth of a turn 9 of the headlamp. anti-clockwise and extract it. F Remove the bulb and change it. To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order. To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order, positioning the alignment lug at the bottom.
203 Practical information
Changing main beam headlamp bulbs Daytime running lamps / F Remove the protective cover by pulling on To reassemble, carry out these operations in sidelamps (light-emitting the tab. reverse order, positioning the alignment lug at diodes - LEDs) F Disconnect the bulb connector. the bottom. For the replacement of this type of LED lamp, F Pull out the bulb and replace it. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
204 Practical information
Changing front foglamp / Changing integrated direction directional lamps indicator side repeater bulbs F Access to the front foglamp is through the F Insert a flat screwdriver between the mirror F Press the central tongue and remove the orifice below the bumper. glass and its base. side repeater. F Disconnect the bulb holder connector by F Use the screwdriver as a lever to extract F Pull the bulb holder out and replace the pressing on the top of the tongue. the mirror glass. failed bulb. F Extract the bulb holder by pressing on the F Unclip the mirror shell by pressing on the To reassemble, carry out these operations in two clips clips (top and bottom). two retaining clips. reverse order. F Replace the module. You should contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a 9 To reassemble, carry out these operations in qualified workshop for the replacement of these reverse order. bulbs.
To obtain this module, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. You can also contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for this replacement.
205 Practical information
Rear lamps
1. Brake lamps (P21W) (light-emitting 4. Foglamp (P21W). diodes-LEDs). 5. Reversing lamp (P21W). Light-emitting diodes - 2. Sidelamps (light-emitting LEDs diodes - LEDs). For replacement, contact a PEUGEOT 3. Direction indicators (PY21W amber) dealer or qualified workshop. (light-emitting diodes-LEDs).
206 Practical information
Changing the third brake lamp Number plate lamps Changing a foglamp or reversing (light-emitting diodes - LEDs) lamp bulb Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified To facilitate the removal of the lamp, carry out Access is by passing a hand under the bumper. workshop. this operation with the tailgate half open. F Turn the bulb holder an eighth of a turn and F Insert a thin screwdriver into the lens pull it out. cutout. F Change the failed bulb. F Push it outwards. To refit, carry out these operations in reverse F Remove the lens. order. 9 F Change the faulty bulb. To refit, press on the lens to clip it in place.
On the left hand side, take care to not touch the exhaust silencer; risk of burns if changing a bulb after stopping the engine.
207 Practical information Changing a fuse
Accessing the tools
The extraction tweezer is fitted to the back of F remove the carrier on which the tweezer is the fusebox cover located inside the glove box. fitted. F Open the glove box lid, F unclip the fusebox cover by pulling at the top right, F disengage the cover completely and turn it over,
208 Practical information
Changing a fuse Before changing a fuse: F the cause of the failure must be identified Installing electrical and rectified, accessories F all electrical consumers must be switched Your vehicle's electrical system is off, designed to operate with standard or F the vehicle must be immobilised with the optional equipment. ignition off, Before installing other electrical F identify the failed fuse using the tables and Good Failed equipment or accessories on your layout drawings in the following pages. vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or To replace a fuse, you must: a qualified workshop. F use the special tweezer to extract the fuse from its housing and check the condition of its filament. F always replace the failed fuse with a fuse Tweezer PEUGEOT will not accept responsibility of the same rating (same colour); using a for the cost incurred in repairing your different rating could cause faults (risk of vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from the installation of fire). The replacement of a fuse not shown in accessories not supplied and not If the fuse fails again soon after replacement, the tables below may cause a serious recommended by PEUGEOT and have the vehicle's electrical system checked by malfunction of your vehicle. Contact not installed in accordance with its a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified 9 instructions, in particular when the workshop. combined consumption of all of the additional equipment connected exceeds 10 milliamperes.
209 Practical information
Fuses in the dashboard
Fuse tables
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F01 40 A Heated rear window.
F02 10 A Heated door mirrors.
F03 30 A Front one-touch windows.
F04 - Not used.
The fusebox is placed in the lower dashboard F05 30 A Rear one-touch windows. (right-hand side). F06 10 A Folding door mirrors.
Folding door mirrors. Access to the fuses F07 10 A F08 - Not used.
F09 15 A Front electric windows (not one-touch).
F10 20 A Hi-Fi amplifier.
F11 - Not used.
F12 - Not used.
210 Practical information
Fuses in the glove box
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F2 5 A Door mirrors, headlamps, diagnostic socket.
F9 5 A Alarm.
F10 5 A Independent telematic unit.
Electrochrome rear view mirror, additional heating, Active City F11 5 A Brake.
F13 5 A Hi-Fi amplifier, parking sensors, reversing camera
F16 15 A Front 12 V socket.
F17 15 A Audio system (without touch screen).
F18 20 A Touch screen, audio system (if touch screen). 9
211 Practical information
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F23 5 A Vanity mirrors, map reading lamps.
F26 15 A Horn.
F27 15 A Screenwash pump.
F28 5 A Anti-theft.
F29 15 A Air conditioning compressor.
F30 15 A Rear wiper.
212 Practical information
Fuses under the bonnet Fuse table
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F16 15 A Daytime running lamps.
F18 10 A Right hand main beam headlamp.
F19 10 A Left hand main beam headlamp.
F25 30 A Headlamp wash relay (accessory).
F29 40 A Front wiper motor.
F30 80 A Pre-heater plugs (Diesel). The fusebox is placed in the engine compartment near the battery (left-hand side).
Access to the fuses F Unclip the cover. F Change the fuse (see corresponding 9 paragraph). F When you have finished, close the cover carefully to ensure correct sealing of the fusebox.
213 Practical information 12 V battery Procedure for starting the engine using another battery or charging a discharged battery.
General points
Lead-acid starter batteries
Batteries contain harmful substances Protect your eyes and face before Versions equipped with Stop & Start are such as sulphuric acid and lead. handling the battery. fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of They must be disposed of in All operations on the battery must be specific technology and specification. accordance with regulations and must carried out in a well ventilated area and Its replacement should be carried not, in any circumstances, be discarded away from naked flames and sources out only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a with household waste. of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of qualified workshop. Take used remote control batteries and explosion or fire. vehicle batteries to a special collection Wash your hands afterwards. point.
If you have an electronic or automatic gearbox, never try to start the engine by pushing the vehicle.
214 Practical information
Access to the battery Starting using another battery When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be started using a slave battery (external or on another vehicle) and jump lead cables or a battery booster.
Never try to start the engine by Some functions, including Stop & Start, connecting a battery charger. are not available if the battery is not Never use a 24 V or higher battery sufficiently charged. booster. The battery is located under the bonnet. First check that the slave battery has a To gain access to it: nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity F open the bonnet using the interior release at least equal to that of the discharged lever, then the exterior safety catch, battery. F secure the bonnet stay, The two vehicles must not be in contact F lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal. with each other. Switch off the electrical consumers on both vehicles (audio system, wipers, lighting, ...). 9 Ensure that the jump lead cables do not pass close to moving parts of the The (-) battery terminal is not engine (cooling fan, belts, ...). accessible. Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when A remote earth point is located on the the engine is running. front left-hand wheel arch.
215 Practical information
F Start the engine of the vehicle with the good battery and leave it running for a Charging the battery using few minutes. a battery charger F Operate the starter on the broken down For optimum service life of the battery, it is vehicle and let the engine run. essential to maintain an adequate state of If the engine does not start straight away, charge. switch off the ignition and wait a few moments In some circumstances it may be necessary to before trying again. charge the battery: - if you use your vehicle essentially for short F Wait until the engine returns to idle then journeys, disconnect the jump lead cables in the - if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for reverse order. several weeks. F Raise the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified if your vehicle has one. your vehicle has one. workshop. F Connect the red cable to the positive F Allow the engine to run for at least terminal (+) of the flat battery A (at 30 minutes, by driving or with the vehicle the metal elbow) then to the positive stationary, so that the battery reaches an terminal (+) of the slave battery B or the adequate state of charge. booster. F Connect one end of the green or black cable to the negative terminal (-) of the slave battery B or the booster (or earth point on the other vehicle). F Connect the other end of the green or black cable to the earth point C on the broken down vehicle.
216 Practical information
F Switch off the ignition. If you envisage charging your vehicle's Disconnecting the battery F Switch off all electrical consumers (audio battery yourself, use only a charger system, lighting, wipers, ...). compatible with lead-acid batteries of a In order to maintain an adequate state nominal voltage of 12 V. of charge for starting the engine, it is recommended that the battery be disconnected if the vehicle is taken out of service for a long period. Wait 2 minutes after switching off the ignition before disconnecting the battery: F close all openings (doors, boot, windows, roof), If this label is present, it is essential F switch off all electrical consumers (audio to use only a 12 V charger, to avoid system, wipers, lighting, ...), causing irreversible damage to the F switch off the ignition and wait for electrical components related to the 4 minutes. F Switch off the charger before connecting Stop & Start system. B Having exposed the battery, it is only the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any necessary to disconnect the (+) terminal. dangerous sparks. F Ensure that the charger cables are in good Follow the instructions for use provided condition. by the manufacturer of the charger. F Raise the plastic cover, if your vehicle has Never reverse polarities. one, on the (+) terminal. 9 F Connect the charger B cables as follows: - the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal of the battery A, It is not necessary to disconnect the - the negative (-) black cable to the earth battery. point C on the vehicle. F At the end of the charging operation, switch off the charger B before disconnecting the cables from the battery A.
217 Practical information
Quick-release terminal Before disconnecting the battery Wait 2 minutes after switching off the ignition before disconnecting the battery. Close the windows and the doors before disconnecting the battery.
Never try to charge a frozen battery. Following reconnection of the If the battery has been frozen, have it battery checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a Following reconnection of the battery, switch on qualified workshop, who will check that the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to the internal components have not been permit initialisation of the electronic systems. damaged and the casing is not cracked, However, if problems remain following this Disconnecting the (+) cable which could cause a leak of toxic and operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a F Raise the lever D fully to release the cable corrosive acid. qualified workshop. terminal clamp E. Referring to the corresponding section, you must yourself reinitialise: Reconnecting the (+) cable - the remote control key, F Position the open clamp E of the cable on - the on-board satellite navigation system. the positive post (+) of the battery. F Press vertically on the clamp E to position it correctly on the battery. The Stop & Start system may not be F Lock the clamp by spreading the operational during the trip following the positioning lug and then lowering the first engine start. lever . D In this case, the system will only be available again after a continuous Do not apply excessive force on the period of immobilisation of the vehicle, lever as locking will not be possible if a period which depends on the ambient the clamp is not positioned correctly; temperature and the state of charge of start the procedure again. the battery (up to about 8 hours).
218 Practical information Load reduction mode Electrical energy economy mode System which manages the use of certain System which manages the duration of use of certain functions to retain a sufficient level of charge functions according to the level of charge in the battery. remaining in the battery. After the engine has stopped, you can still use functions such as the audio and telematics When the vehicle is being driven, the load system, windscreen wipers, dipped beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a maximum reduction function temporarily deactivates combined duration of about 30 minutes. certain functions, such as the air conditioning, the heated rear screen... Switching to economy Exiting economy mode The deactivated functions are reactivated automatically as soon as conditions permit. mode These functions are reactivated automatically Once this time has elapsed, a message next time the vehicle is driven. appears in the screen indicating that the F To restore these functions immediately, vehicle has switched to economy mode and the start the engine and let it run for at least active functions are put on standby. 5 minutes. If a telephone call is being made at this time, it will be maintained for around 10 minutes with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio system. A flat battery prevents the engine from starting (refer to the corresponding section). 9
219 Practical information Changing a wiper blade Before removing a front Fitting wiper blade F Put the corresponding new wiper blade in F Within one minute after switching off place and clip it. the ignition, operate the wiper stalk to F Fold down the wiper arm carefully. position the wiper blades vertically on the windscreen.
Removing After fitting a front wiper F Raise the corresponding wiper arm. blade F Unclip the wiper blade and remove it. F Switch on the ignition. F Operate the wiper stalk again to park the wiper blades.
220 Practical information Towing Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using a removable towing eye. Towing eye General recommendations Observe the legislation in force in your country. Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is higher than that of the towed vehicle. The driver must remain at the wheel of the towed vehicle and must have a valid driving licence. When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towing arm; rope and straps are prohibited. The towing vehicle must move off gently.
When towing a vehicle with the engine off, there is no longer any power assistance for braking or steering. In the following cases, you must always call on a professional recovery service: - vehicle broken down on a motorway or fast road, - four-wheel drive vehicle, The towing eye is installed in the boot under - when it is not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release the floor. the parking brake, To gain access to it: - towing with only two wheels on the ground, F open the boot, - where there is no approved towing arm available... F lift the floor and remove it, F remove the towing eye from the holder. 9
221 Practical information
Towing your vehicle Towing another vehicle
F Place the gear lever in neutral (position N on an electronic or automatic gearbox). Failure to observe this instruction could result in damage to certain components (braking, transmission...) and the absence of braking assistance the next time the engine is started.
F On the front bumper, unclip the cover by F Unlock the steering by turning the key F On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by inserting the flat end of the towing eye in in the ignition one notch and release the pressing at the bottom. the bottom of the cover. parking brake. F Screw the towing eye in fully. F Screw the towing eye in fully. F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on F Install the towing arm. F Install the towing arm. both vehicles. F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short both vehicles. distance. F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short distance.
222 Practical information Towing a trailer
We recommend the use of genuine You must observe the maximum trailer PEUGEOT towbars and their harnesses weight, indicated on the registration that have been tested and approved certificate or in the technical from the design stage of your vehicle, specification for your vehicle. and that the fitting of the towbar is entrusted to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. If the towbar is not fitted by a PEUGEOT dealer, it must still be fitted in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer's instructions. For more information on weights (and the towed loads which apply to your Your vehicle is primarily designed for vehicle) refer to the corresponding transporting people and luggage, but it may section. also be used for towing a trailer. Driving with a trailer places greater demands on the towing vehicle and the driver must take particular care. For more advice on driving when towing, refer to the corresponding section. 9
223 Practical information
When towing Cooling Lighting Towing a trailer on a slope increases the F Check the electrical lighting and signalling Distribution of loads temperature of the coolant. on the trailer and the headlamp beam As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling height of your vehicle. F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the capacity is not dependent on the engine speed. For more information on adjusting the heaviest items are as close as possible to F To lower the engine speed, reduce your headlamp beam height, refer to the the axle and the nose weight approaches speed. corresponding section. the maximum permitted without The maximum towed load on a long incline exceeding it. depends on the gradient and the ambient Air density decreases with altitude, thus temperature. reducing engine performance. Above The rear parking sensors will be In all cases, keep a check on the coolant 1 000 metres, the maximum towed load must deactivated automatically if a genuine temperature. be reduced by 10 % for every 1 000 metres of PEUGEOT towbar is used. altitude. F If the warning lamp and the STOP warning lamp come on, For more information on weights (and stop the vehicle and switch off the towed loads which apply to your the engine as soon as possible. vehicle) refer to the corresponding section. Braking Towing a trailer increases the braking distance. To avoid overheating of the brakes, the use of engine braking is recommended. Side wind F Take into account the increased sensitivity to side wind. Tyres F Check the tyre pressures of the towing vehicle and of the trailer, observing the recommended pressures.
224 Practical information Towbar with quickly detachable towball Presentation
This towbar allows the towball to be fitted and removed quickly and easily without the use of tools. Installed behind the rear bumper, the towbar is invisible after removing the towball and folding the trailer harness socket carrier.
A. Locked position B. Unlocked position The locking wheel is not in contact with the The locking wheel is in contact with the towball. towball (gap of about 5 mm). The green mark is hidden. The green mark is visible. The lock for the locking wheel is facing forward. The lock for the locking wheel is facing The peg is not visible. rearward. The bolt is visible and extends beyond the Observe the legislation in force in the towball. country in which you are driving. 1. Carrier. 2. Protective blanking plug. 9 3. Security ring. For more information on the technical 4. Folding trailer harness socket. characteristics of the towbar (its 5. Detachable towball. maximum load, ...), refer to the 6. Locking / unlocking wheel. corresponding section. 7. Security key lock. For information on safely towing a 8. Ball protector. trailer, refer to the corresponding 9. Storage bag. section.
225 Practical information
Before each use After use Fitting the towball Check that the towball is correctly fitted by For journeys made without a trailer or load verifying the following points: carrier, the trailer harness socket must be - the towball is correctly locked in place folded away, the towball removed and the (position A), protective blanking plug inserted in the - the security key lock is on and the key carrier. This measure applies particularly removed; the locking wheel can no if the towball could hinder visibility of the longer be operated, number plate or lighting. - the towball must no longer move at all in its carrier; try to shake it by hand.
Remove the protective blanking plug from the During use carrier and check the condition of the fixing system. If necessary, clean the carrier with a Never unlock the towball when a trailer or brush or clean cloth. load carrier is fitted. Take the towball from the storage bag. Never exceed the maximum authorised Remove the protective cover from the ball. weight for the vehicle plus trailer (Gross Stow the plug and cover in the storage bag. Train Weight - GTW). Check that the towball is unlocked (position B). Before driving, check the adjustment of the If not, insert the key in the lock and turn the headlamp beam height. key clockwise to unlock the mechanism. For more information on adjusting the Then press the locking wheel and turn it fully headlamps, refer to the corresponding clockwise. section.
226 Practical information
Take the towball in both hands; insert the end Check that the towball has correctly locked in Attach the trailer to the towball. of the towball into the carrier, then, to ensure place (position A). Attach the cable on the trailer to the security that it has correctly locked in place, pull firmly Turn the key anti-clockwise to lock the towball ring located on the carrier. down on the ball end of the towball. fixing mechanism. Lower the trailer harness socket carrier by The locking wheel automatically turns a quarter Always remove the key and keep it in a safe pulling down on the ring visible below the of a turn anti-clockwise, making a perceptible place. bumper. click; take care to keep your hands clear. If the key cannot be turned or removed, this Remove the protective cover from the socket means that the towball is not fitted correctly; and connect the trailer wiring harness. start the procedure again. If one of the locking conditions is not met, start the procedure again. 9 In all cases, if the marking remains red, do not use the towbar and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
227 Practical information
Removing the towball
Disconnect the trailer harness from the socket Insert the key into the lock. Grasp the towball firmly with one hand; with on the carrier. Turn the key clockwise to unlock the towball the other hand, press and turn the locking Detach the cable on the trailer from the security fixing mechanism. wheel clockwise as far as it will go. ring on the carrier. Extract the towball from the bracket. Unhook the trailer from the towball. Remove the key to avoid it being damaged Return the trailer harness connector carrier to when stowing the towball. the folded position.
Be ready for the weight of the towball (around 3.5 kg). Risk of injury!
228 Practical information
Maintenance Stowing the towball
Correct operation is only possible if the towball It is recommended that the removable towball and its carrier remain clean. be safely stowed, preferably in a storage space Before cleaning the vehicle with a high pressure below the boot floor. jet wash, the towbar harness socket carrier must Attach the towball using the bag tie cord. be folded away, the towball removed and the protective blanking plug inserted in the carrier.
For any work on the towbar, go to Never leave the removable towball Refit the protective cover for the ball. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified unsecured in the boot. In the event of Stow the towball in its bag. workshop. sudden braking, a towball left loose Refit the protective blanking plug to the carrier. in the boot could present a danger to passengers in the vehicle. Furthermore, the towball and the boot risk being damaged. 9
229 Practical information Fitting roof bars Advice on care and maintenance Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for the installation of longitudinal bars. Recommendations on the care and To install transverse roof bars, observe the fitting positions indicated by markings on the maintenance of your vehicle are given in the longitudinal roof bars. warranty and maintenance record.
Maximum authorised weight on the roof bars, for a loading height not exceeding 40 cm (with the exception of bicycle carriers): refer to the instructions provided with the roof bars. If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed of the vehicle to the profile of the road to avoid damaging the roof bars and the fixings on the roof. Be sure to refer to national legislation in order to comply with the regulations for transporting objects which are longer Use accessories recommended by than the vehicle. PEUGEOT, observing the manufacturer's recommendations and fitting instructions so as to avoid the risk of damaging the body (deformation, scratches, ...). To place a load on the roof, it is necessary to mount the load on the transverse roof bars. The longitudinal roof bars are not removable.
230 Practical information Accessories A wide range of accessories and genuine parts is available from the PEUGEOT dealer network. These accessories and parts are all suitable for your vehicle and benefit from PEUGEOT's recommendation and warranty.
Conversion kits "Transport solutions": "Security and safety": You can obtain an "Enterprise" kit to convert a boot liner, luggage net, roof bars, bicycle anti-theft alarm, window engraving, wheel private car into a trade vehicle. carrier on roof bars, ski carrier, roof box, ... security bolts, child seats and booster cushions, breathalyzer, first aid kit, warning triangle, high visibility jacket, stolen vehicle tracking system, temporary puncture repair kit, snow chains, non-slip covers, front foglamps kit, dog guard...
"Comfort": "Styling": "Protection": door deflectors, side blinds and rear blind, gear lever knob, spoiler, styling strips, alloy mats*, seat covers compatible with lateral cigarette lighter, boot dividers, coat hanger wheels, trims, chromed mirror shells, mirror airbags, mud flaps, door sill protectors, bumper fixed to head restraint, front and rear parking personalisation kits, wheel caps and exterior protection strips, aluminium foot rest... sensors... stickers... 9
* To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - ensure that the mat is positioned and secured correctly, - never fit one mat on top of another. 231 Practical information
"Multimedia": audio systems, portable satellite navigation By visiting a PEUGEOT dealer, you can also Depending on the legislation in force in systems, semi-integral support for portable obtain products for cleaning and maintenance the country, certain safety equipment satellite navigation system, hands-free kit, (exterior and interior) - including ecological may be compulsory: high visibility speakers, connection kit for MP3 or CD player, products in the "TECHNATURE" range, topping safety vests, warning triangles, CD player for touch screen... up products (screenwash...), touch-up pens breathalyzers, spare bulbs, spare fuses, and paint aerosols for the exact colour of your fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud flaps vehicle, refills (cartridge for the temporary at the rear of the vehicle. puncture repair kit...), ...
Installation of radio The fitting of electrical equipment or communication accessories which are not recommended transmitters by PEUGEOT may result in a failure of Before installing any after-market radio your vehicle's electronic system and communication transmitter, you can excessive electrical consumption. contact a PEUGEOT dealer for the Contact a PEUGEOT dealer specification of transmitters which can for information on the range of be fitted (frequency, maximum power, recommended equipment and aerial position, specific installation accessories. requirements), in line with the Vehicle Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004/104/EC).
232 PEUGEOT & TOTAL, A PARTNERSHIP TO DELIVER BETTER PERFORMANCE! 2015 was marked by PEUGEOT's return to Rally- Raid, one of the most difficult motorsport disciplines in the world. To obtain the best performance in these trials, PEUGEOT Sport chose TOTAL QUARTZ for the PEUGEOT 2008 DKR, a lubricant of high technology which protects the engine in the most severe conditions.
TOTAL QUARTZ protects your engine against the effects of time. TOTAL QUARTZ Ineo First is a high performance lubricant, the result of work done together by PEUGEOT and TOTAL R&D. Specially formulated for the engines in PEUGEOT vehicles, its innovative technology significantly reduces
CO2 emissions and keeps your engine clean. 10
RECOMMENDS Checks Bonnet
Before doing anything under the bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid any risk of injury resulting from an automatic change to START mode.
Opening
B. Exterior safety catch. C. Bonnet stay.
F Lift the safety catch B and raise the F Unclip the stay C from its housing and bonnet. place it in the support slot to hold the bonnet open.
Do not open the bonnet under very Closing windy conditions. F Take the stay C out of its support slot. When the engine is hot, handle the F Clip the stay back into its housing. A. Interior release lever. exterior safety catch and the stay with F Lower the bonnet and release it at the end F Open the left hand front door. care (risk of burns). of its travel. F Pull the release lever A, located at the F Pull the bonnet to check that it has latched bottom of the door aperture, towards you. correctly.
The location of the interior release lever Because of the presence of electrical prevents opening of the bonnet when equipment under the bonnet, it is the left hand front door is closed. recommended that exposure to water (rain, washing, ...) be limited.
234 Checks Petrol engines 1. Screenwash reservoir. 2. Coolant header tank. 3. Brake fluid reservoir. 4. Battery / Fuses. 5. Fusebox. 6. Air filter. 7. Engine oil dipstick. 8. Engine oil filler cap.
10
235 Checks Diesel engines 1. Screenwash reservoir. 2. Coolant header tank. 3. Brake fluid reservoir. 4. Battery / Fuses. 5. Fusebox. 6. Air filter. 7. Engine oil dipstick. 8. Engine oil filler cap. 9. Priming pump (depending on engine).
The AdBlue® tank is located in the boot below the spare wheel and/or the storage well.
236 Checks Checking levels Check all of these levels regularly, in line with the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated. If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Take care when working under the bonnet, as certain areas of the engine may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the cooling fan could start at any time (even with the ignition off).
Oil level Brake fluid The check is carried out either when the Engine oil change Level ignition is switched on using the oil level Refer to the warranty and maintenance record The brake fluid level should be close indicator in the instrument panel (depending for details of the interval for this operation. to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check on version), or using the dipstick. In order to maintain the reliability of the engine the brake pad wear. It will only be correct if the vehicle is on level and emission control system, never use ground and the engine has been off for more additives in the engine oil. than 30 minutes. Changing the fluid It is normal to top up the oil level Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule between two services (or oil changes). Oil specification for details of the interval for this operation. PEUGEOT recommends that you check The oil must be the correct grade for your the level, and top up if necessary, every engine and conform to the manufacturer's 3 000 miles (5 000 kms). recommendations. Fluid specification The brake fluid must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations. 10
237 Checks
Coolant level Screenwash fluid level
The coolant level should be close Changing the coolant Top up the level when necessary. to the "MAX" mark but should never The coolant does not have to be replaced at exceed it. routine services. When the engine is warm, the temperature of the coolant is regulated by the fan.
The cooling fan may start after Fluid specification Fluid specification switching off the engine: take care The coolant must conform to the For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing, with articles and clothing that might manufacturer's recommendations. this fluid must not be topped up or replaced be caught by the fan blades. with plain water. In wintry conditions, it is recommended that you use an ethyl alcohol or methanol based fluid.
In addition, as the cooling system is pressurised, wait at least one hour after switching off the engine before carrying out any work. To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the pressure to drop. When the pressure has dropped, remove the cap and top up the level.
238 Checks
Diesel additive Used products
A low additive level is indicated by Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or illumination of the service warning fluids with the skin. lamp, accompanied by an audible warning and Most of these fluids are harmful to a message in the screen (if a display screen is health or indeed very corrosive. fitted).
Topping-up This additive must be topped-up by a Do not discard used oil or fluids into PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop sewers or onto the ground. without delay. Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop (France) or to an authorised waste disposal site.
10
239 Checks Checks Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the warranty and maintenance record and according to your engine. Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. 12 V battery Air filter and passenger compartment filter Diesel The battery does not require any maintenance. Refer to the warranty and Particle filter However, check regularly that the terminals maintenance record for details of are correctly tightened (versions without quick the replacement intervals for these The start of saturation of the release terminals) and that the connections components. particle filter is indicated by are clean. Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty the fixed illumination of this warning lamp When carrying out any operation on the atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle accompanied by a warning message in the screen (if a display screen is fitted). 12 V battery, refer to the corresponding section (e.g. city driving), replace them twice as often As soon as the traffic conditions permit, for details of the precautions to be taken before if necessary. starting work. A clogged passenger compartment filter may regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at have an adverse effect on the performance least 40 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp of the air conditioning system and generate goes off. undesirable odours. If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates a low additive level.
Oil filter On a new vehicle, the first particle filter regeneration operations may be Versions equipped with Stop & Start are Replace the oil filter each time the accompanied by a "burnt" smell, which fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of specific engine oil is changed. is normal. technology and specification. Refer to the warranty and Following prolonged operation of the Its replacement should be carried out only by a maintenance record for details of vehicle at very low speed or at idle, PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. the replacement interval for this you may, in exceptional circumstances, component. notice the emission of water vapour at the exhaust on acceleration. This does not affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the environment.
240 Checks
Manual gearbox Brake pads Parking brake The gearbox does not require any Brake wear depends on the style If excessive travel or a loss of maintenance (no oil change). of driving, particularly in the case effectiveness of this system is Refer to the warranty and of vehicles used in town, over short noticed, the parking brake must be maintenance record for the checking distances. It may be necessary to have checked, even between two services. interval for this component. the condition of the brakes checked, even between vehicle services. Checking this system must be done by a Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. the brake fluid level indicates that the brake Electronic gearbox pads are worn. The gearbox does not require any Only use products recommended by maintenance (no oil change). Brake disc wear PEUGEOT or products of equivalent Refer to the manufacturer's service quality and specification. schedule for the checking interval for For information on checking brake In order to optimise the operation of this component. disc wear, contact a PEUGEOT units as important as those in the dealer or a qualified workshop. braking system, PEUGEOT selects and offers very specific products. Automatic gearbox After washing the vehicle, dampness, or in wintry conditions, ice can form on the brake discs and pads: braking The gearbox does not require any efficiency may be reduced. Make light maintenance (no oil change). brake applications to dry and defrost 10 Refer to the manufacturer's service the brakes. schedule for the checking interval for this component.
241 Technical data General information Engine characteristics Weights and towed loads
The engine characteristics (capacity, The maximum weights and towed loads for your GVW: gross vehicle weight, the maximum maximum power, maximum power speed, fuel, vehicle are given are given in the registration authorised vehicle weight.
CO2 emissions...) for your vehicle are given in document, as well as in sales brochures. GTW: gross train weight, the maximum the registration document, as well as in sales These values are also present on the authorised weight of vehicle plus trailer. brochures. manufacturer's plate or label. These characteristics correspond to the For more information on these identification values type-approved on a test bed, under markings, refer to the corresponding section. conditions defined in European legislation For further information, contact a PEUGEOT (Directive 1999/99/EC). dealer or a qualified workshop. High ambient temperatures may result For more information, contact a PEUGEOT in a reduction in the performance of the dealer or a qualified workshop. vehicle to protect the engine; when the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the towed weight. The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg). The gross train weight and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for every additional Towing with a lightly loaded vehicle can 1 000 metres. adversely affect roadholding. The weight of the braked trailer can be Braking distances are increased when increased, within the GTW limit, on condition towing a trailer. that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced Never exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) when by the same amount. towing (comply with the legislation in The recommended nose weight is the vertical force in your country). load on the towball (removable with or without tools).
242 Technical data Engines and gearboxes - PETROL
1.2 litre PureTech 82 1.2 litre PureTech 110 Engine 1.2 litre PureTech 82 S&S S&S
ETG5 ETG5 Manual Manual Automatic Gearbox electronic electronic (5-speed) (5-speed) (6-speed) (5-speed) (5-speed)
HMZ0 HNVT/S Model code: CU HMZ0/P HMZ6/PS HNZ6/S HMZ6 HNZT/S
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 199 1 199 1 199 1 199
Bore x Stroke (mm) 75 x 90.5 75 x 90.5 75 x 90.5 75 x 90.5
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 60 60 81 81
Max power engine speed (rpm) 5 750 5 750 6 250 5 500
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 118 118 205 205
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 2 750 2 750 1 750 1 500
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes Yes
Engine oil capacity (in litres) 3.25 3.25 3.5 3.5 (with filter replacement) 11 * The maximum power corresponds to the value type approved on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC). 243 Technical data Engines and gearboxes - PETROL
1.2 litre PureTech 130 Engine 1.6 litre VTI 120 S&S
Manual Manual Automatic Gearbox (6-speed) (5-speed) (4-speed)
Model code: CU HNYM/S 5FS0 5FS9
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 199 1 598
Bore x Stroke (mm) 75 x 90,5 77 x 85,8
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 94 88
Max power engine speed (rpm) 5 000 6 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 230 160
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750 4 250
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded
Catalytic converter Yes Yes
Engine oil capacity (in litres) 3.5 4.25 (with filter replacement)
* The maximum power corresponds to the value type approved on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC). 244 Technical data Weights and towed loads (in kg) - PETROL 1.2 litre 1.2 litre PureTech 110 Engine 1.2 litre PureTech 82 PureTech 82 S&S S&S
ETG5 ETG5 Manual Manual Automatic Gearbox electronic electronic (5-speed) (5-speed) (6-speed) (5-speed) (5-speed) HMZ0 Model code: CU HMZ0/P HMZ6/PS HNZ6/S HNVT/S HNZT/S HMZ6 - Unladen weight 1 045 1 055 1 055 1 090 1 160 1 150 - Kerb weight* 1 120 1 130 1 130 1 165 1 235 1 225
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 582 1 573 1 593 1 656 1 690 1 690
- Gross train weight (GTW) 2 362 2 023 2 043 2 606 2 140 2 640 on a 12 % gradient - Braked trailer (within GTW limit) 780 450 450 950 450 950 on a 10 % or 12 % gradient - Braked trailer** with load transfer (within the 1 100 770 770 1 270 450 1 250 GTW limit) - Unbraked trailer 560 450 450 580 450 610 - Recommended nose weight 51 51 51 51 51 51 The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country). High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load. 11 * The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg). ** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding. 245 Technical data Weights and towed loads (in kg) - PETROL 1.2 litre PureTech 130 Engine 1.6 litre VTi 120 S&S
Manual Manual Automatic Gearbox (6-speed) (6-speed) (4-speed)
Model code: CU HNYM/S 5FS0 5FS9
- Unladen weight 1 160 1 080 1 140 - Kerb weight* 1 235 1 155 1 215
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 675 1 644 1 666
- Gross train weight (GTW) 2 625 2 614 2 616 on a 12 % gradient - Braked trailer (within GTW limit) 950 970 950 en a 10 % or 12 % gradient - Braked trailer** with load transfer 1 270 1 270 1270 (within the GTW limit) - Unbraked trailer 580 570 600 - Recommended nose weight 51 51 51
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country). High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg). ** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding. 246 Technical data Engines and gearboxes - DIESEL
Engine 1.6 litre BlueHDi 75 1.6 litre BlueHDi 100
Manual Manual Gearbox (5-speed) (5-speed)
Model code: CU BHW6 BHYK BHY6
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560 1 560
Bore x Stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3 75 x 88.3
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 55 70
Max power engine speed (rpm) 3 500 3 500
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 233 254
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750 1 750
Fuel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter Yes Yes
Particle filter Yes Yes
Engine oil capacity (in litres) 3.75 3.75 (with filter replacement) 11 * The maximum power corresponds to the value type approved on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC). 247 Technical data Engines and gearboxes - DIESEL 1.6 litre BlueHDi 1.6 litre BlueHDi 1.6 litre BlueHDi 100 Engine 1.6 litre e-HDi 92 116** 120 S&S S&S S&S ETG6 Manual Manual Manual Manual electronic Gearbox (5-speed) (5-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed)
Model code: CU 9HP0/S 9HP8/PS BHYK/S BHY6/S BHXM/S BHZM/S
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560 1 560 1 560 1 560
Bore x Stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3 75 x 88.3 75 x 88.3 75 x 88.3
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 68 70 85 88
Max power engine speed (rpm) 4 000 3 500 3 500 3 500
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 230 254 300 300
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750 1 750 1 750 1 750
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes Yes
Particle filter Yes Yes Yes Yes
Engine oil capacity (in litres) 3.75 3.75 3.75 3.75 (with filter replacement)
* The maximum power corresponds to the value type approved on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC). ** For BELGIUM. 248 Technical data Weights and towed loads (in kg) - DIESEL
Engine 1.6 litre BlueHDi 75 1.6 litre BlueHDi 100
Manual Manual Gearbox (5-speed) (5-speed)
Model code: CU BHW6 BHYK BHY6
- Unladen weight 1 160 1 180 1 180 - Kerb weight* 1 235 1 255 1 255
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 680 1 710 1 710
- Gross train weight (GTW) 2 300 2 210 2 660 on a 12% gradient - Braked trailer (within GTW limit) 620 500 950 on a 10% or 12% gradient - Braked trailer** with load transfer (within the 940 820 1 270 GTW limit) - Unbraked trailer 610 500 610 - Recommended nose weight 51 51 51
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country). High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load. 11 * The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg). ** T he weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding. 249 Technical data Weights and towed loads (in kg) - DIESEL 1.6 litre BlueHDi 100 Engine 1.6 litre e-HDI 92 S&S
Manual ETG6 Manual Gearbox (5-speed) electronic (6-speed) (5-speed)
Model code: CU 9HP0/S 9HP8/PS BHYK/S BHY6/S
- Unladen weight 1 160 1 170 1 180 1 180 - Kerb weight* 1 235 1 245 1 255 1 255
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 684 1 692 1 710 1 710
- Gross train weight (GTW) 2 634 2 192 2 210 2 660 on a 12% gradient - Braked trailer (within GTW limit) 950 500 500 950 on a 10% or 12% gradient - Braked trailer** with load transfer (within the 1 270 820 820 1 270 GTW limit) - Unbraked trailer 610 500 500 610 - Recommended nose weight 38 51 51 51
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country). High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load. * The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg). ** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding. 250 Technical data Weights and towed loads (in kg) - DIESEL 1.6 litre BlueHDi 116*** 1.6 litre BlueHDi 120 Engine S&S S&S
Manual Manual Gearbox (6-speed) (6-speed)
Model code: CU BHXM/S BHZM/S
- Unladen weight 1 200 - Kerb weight* 1 275
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 726
- Gross train weight (GTW) 2 706 on a 12% gradient - Braked trailer (within GTW limit) 980 on a 10% or 12% gradient - Braked trailer** with load transfer 1 300 (within the GTW limit) - Unbraked trailer 620 - Recommended nose weight 51
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country). High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load. * The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg). 11 ** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding. *** For BELGIUM. 251 Technical data Dimensions (in mm)
* Mirrors folded. 252 Technical data Identification markings Various visible markings for the identification of your vehicle. It bears the following information: - the tyre inflation pressures with and without load, - the tyre sizes, - the inflation pressure of the spare wheel, - the paint colour code.
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) C. Manufacturer's label. under the bonnet. The VIN is indicated on a self-destroying This number is engraved on the bodywork label affixed to the middle pillar, on the near the damper support. passenger's side. The tyre pressures must be checked when the tyres are cold, at least once B. Vehicle identification Number (VIN) on D. Tyre/paint label. a month. the windscreen lower crossmember. This label is fitted to the middle pillar, on This number is indicated on a self-adhesive the driver's side. label which is visible through the windscreen. Low tyre pressures increase fuel consumption. 11
253 Audio and Telematics
Emergency call PEUGEOT Connect SOS Test of operation of the system: The green indicator lamp comes on for The "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" centre immediately 3 seconds when the ignition is switched locates your vehicle, communicates in your language*, on, signifying that a call can be made. and depending on the circumstances, makes a call to the appropriate public emergency services*. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer if the orange indicator lamp comes on: - flashing, then off: the system has Conditions for use: a fault. - In countries where the service is not - on fixed: the back-up battery available, or when the locating service has must be replaced. been expressly declined, the call is sent In either case, the emergency and assistance directly to the emergency services (112) calls service may not work. without the vehicle location. 112 is the Contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as telephone number reserved for emergency possible. calls and is accepted throughout the European Union. - "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" is subject to The fault with the system does not the terms and conditions for the service prevent the vehicle being driven. available from dealers, and to technological and technical limitations. Operation: "Emergency call". Pressing this button for more than 2 seconds starts * Depending on the geographical cover of a call to the PEUGEOT Connect SOS centre. Inadvertent press: "PEUGEOT Connect SOS", "PEUGEOT - The green indicator lamp flashes. - pressing brings on the green indicator lamp. Connect Assistance" and the official national - A voice message confirms that the call is being - pressing again immediately cancels the call. language selected by the owner of the dealt with. A voice message confirms the cancellation. vehicle. The green indicator lamp on fixed indicates that - if the call connects, explain to the contact The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT communication has been established. It goes off at that it was a mistake. The green indicator CONNECT services is available from dealers the end of the communication. lamp goes off at the end of the call. or at www.peugeot.co.uk. 254 Audio and Telematics
Assistance call PEUGEOT Connect Assistance In the event of a breakdown, pressing If an impact is detected by the airbag If you benefit from the PEUGEOT Connect for more than 2 seconds starts the control unit, and independently of Packs offer with the SOS and assistance call. the deployment of any airbags, an pack included, there are additional services A voice message confirms that the emergency call is made automatically. available to you in your MyPEUGEOT call has been made. personal space, via the PEUGEOT Internet website in your country, accessible on Inadvertent press: www.peugeot.co.uk. - pressing again immediately cancels the call. A voice message confirms the cancellation. If you purchased your vehicle outside the PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the configuration of these services and, if desired, modified to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country, configuration is possible in the official national language of your choice.
For technical reasons and in particular to improve the quality of "PEUGEOT CONNECT services" to customers, the manufacturer reserves the right to update the vehicle's on-board telematic system. . 255
Audio and Telematics
7-inch touch screen GPS satellite navigation - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth® telephone
Contents First steps 258 Steering mounted controls 260 Menus 261 Navigation 262 Navigation - Guidance 270 Traffic 274 Radio Media 276 Radio 282 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 284 Media 286 Settings 290 Connected services 298 Internet browser 299 MirrorLinkTM 302 CarPlay® 306 Telephone 310 Frequently asked questions 318
The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in As a safety measure, the driver should only carry out operations your vehicle. which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary. The display of an energy economy mode message signals that electrical systems operating are going into standby. Refer to the energy economy mode section. . 257 Audio and Telematics
First steps Use the buttons to the left of the touch screen In very hot conditions, the system may for access to the menu carousels, then press go into stand-by (screen and sound the virtual buttons in the touch screen. completely off) for a minimum period of Each menu is displayed in one or two pages 5 minutes. (primary page and secondary page).
Primary page Secondary page
258 Audio and Telematics
Short-cuts: using the touch buttons in the upper band of the touch screen, it is possible to go In very hot conditions, the volume may directly to the selection of audio source, the list be limited to protect the system. The of stations (or titles, depending on the source). return to normal takes place when the temperature in the passenger compartment drops.
The screen is of the "resistive" type, it is necessary to press firmly, particularly for "flick" gestures (scrolling through a Press on Menu to display the menu list, moving the map...). A simple wipe carrousel. will not be enough. Pressing with more than one finger is not recognised. The screen can be used when wearing Selection of audio source (depending on Press on SRC to display the audio gloves. This technology allows use at version): sources carrousel. all temperatures. - FM /DAB* /AM stations. - USB memory stick. - CD player (located in the glove box)*. Volume adjustment (each source is independent, - Smartphone via MirrorLinkTM or CarPlay®. including traffic announcements (TA) and - Telephone connected by Bluetooth* and To clean the screen, use a soft navigation instructions). with Bluetooth* audio streaming. non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) - Media player connected to the auxiliary without any additional product. socket (jack, cable not supplied). With the engine running, press to Do not use pointed objects on the - Jukebox*, after first copying audio files to mute the sound. screen. the internal memory of the system. With the ignition off, press to switch Do not touch the screen with wet the system on. hands.
* Depending on equipment. . 259 Audio and Telematics
Steering mounted controls
Press: mute on / off. Radio, rotate: automatic search for Telephone: start or answer a call. the previous / next station. Call in progress: telephone menu Radio, press: preset stations. (end call, secret mode, hands-free Media, rotate: previous / next track. mode). Increase volume. Press: confirm a selection. Telephone, press and hold: reject an incoming call, end a call in progress; other than call in progress, telephone Decrease volume. menu. Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks. Change audio source: radio, media. Radio, press and hold: update the list of stations received.
260 Audio and Telematics
Menus Navigation Radio Media Settings (Depending on equipment)
Enter navigation settings and choose a Select an audio source, a radio station, display Adjust the settings for sound (balance, destination. photographs. ambience, ...) and the display (language, units, date, time, ...).
Connected services Telephone Driving (Depending on equipment)
Connect using the "Internet browser". Connect a telephone by Bluetooth®. Access to the trip computer. Operate certain applications on your Access to the CarPlay® function after Activate, deactivate or enter settings for certain smartphone via MirrorLinkTM or CarPlay®. connection of your smartphone by USB cable. vehicle functions. . 261 Audio and Telematics
Navigation Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Navigation Route settings
262 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Enter destination Display recent destinations. Fastest Shortest Time/distance Ecological Choose the navigation criteria. The map displays the route chosen according to Tolls these criteria. Route settings Ferries Navigation Traffic Settings Strict-Close Navigation Show route on map Display the map and start navigation. Confirm Save the options.
Save current location Save the current address.
Stop navigation Delete the navigation information. Choose the volume for voice and announcement Voice synthesis of street names. Detour from your initial route by a determined Diversion distance. Display in text mode.
Zoom in.
Zoom out. Navigation Display in full screen mode. Use the arrows to move the map. Switch to 2D map. . 263 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Enter destination Address
For managing contacts and their addresses, refer to the Navigation "Telephone" section.
Contacts
To use the telephone functions, refer to the "Telephone" section.
264 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Current loc.
Point of interest Address settings
Town center Address Save Save the current address.
Add waypoint Add a waypoint to the route.
Navigate to Press to calculate the route.
Addresses Navigation View Secondary page Contacts Navigate to Select a contact then calculate the route. Enter destination Search for contact
Call
On the map Display the map and zoom to view the roads.
Create, add or delete a waypoint or view the Itinerary itinerary.
Stop Delete navigation information.
Navigate to Press to calculate the route. . 265 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Navigation Search for a point of interest
Point of interest displayed on the map
266 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments All POIs
Navigation Motor List of categories available. After choosing the category, select the points of Secondary page Dining/hotels interest.
Search for POI Personal Search Save the settings.
Select all Navigation Delete Choose the display settings for POIs. Secondary page Import POIs Show POIs Confirm Save the options.
. 267 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Diversion
Traffic messages
Map settings
Map settings Navigation
Settings
Settings Moving between Settings the two menus.
268 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments On the route
Around vehicle Navigation Settings for the choice of messages and the Near destination filter radius. Secondary page Detour over a distance Traffic messages Detour Recalculate route
Finish Save your selections.
Flat view north heading
Orientation Flat view vehicle heading
Perspective view Navigation Choose the display and orientation of the Maps map. Secondary page "Day" map colour Map settings Aspect "Night" map colour
Auomatic day/night
Confirm Save the settings.
Route settings Navigation Voice Enter settings and choose the volume for the voice and announcement of street names. Secondary page Alarm!
Settings Traffic options Confirm Save your selections. . 269 Audio and Telematics
Navigation - Guidance Choosing a new destination Towards a new destination
Press on Navigation to display the Select "Save" to save the address To delete navigation information, primary page. entered as a contact entry. press on "Settings". The system allows up to 200 entries.
Press on the secondary page. Press on "Stop navigation".
Select "Navigate to". Select "Enter destination". To resume navigation press on "Settings". Choose the navigation criteria: Select "Address". "Fastest" or "Shortest" or "Time/ Press on "Resume guidance". distance" or "Ecological".
Select the "Country:" from Choose the restriction criteria: the list offered, then in the "Tolls", "Ferries", "Traffic", "Strict", same way the "City:" or "Close". its post code, the "Road:", the "N°:". Select "Confirm". Confirm each time.
Or Press on "Show route on map" to start navigation.
270 Audio and Telematics
Towards a recent destination Towards a contact
Press on Navigation to display the Select a destination from To be able to use navigation "towards primary page. the contacts in the list a contact in the directory", it is first offered. necessary to enter the address for your Press on the secondary page. contact. Select "Navigate to". Press on Navigation to display the primary page. Select "Enter destination". Select the criteria then "Confirm" to Press on the secondary page. start navigation.
Select an address from the list offered. Select "Enter destination".
Select "Navigate to". Select "Contacts".
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or press "Show route on map" to start navigation. . 271 Audio and Telematics
Towards GPS coordinates Towards a point on the map Towards points of interest (POI)
Press on Navigation to display the Press on Navigation to display the Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different primary page. primary page. categories.
Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary page. Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Select "Enter destination". Select "Enter destination". Press on the secondary page.
Select "Address". Select "On the map". Select "Search for POI".
Enter the "Longitude:" Zooming in on the map shows points with Select "All POIs", then the "Latitude:". information.
A long press on a point opens its content. Or Select "Navigate to". "Motor",
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or press "Show route on map" to start Or navigation. "Dining/hotels".
272 Audio and Telematics
An annual mapping update allows new points of interest to be presented to you. You can also update the Risk areas / Danger areas every month. The detailed procedure is available on: http://peugeot.navigation.com.
. 273 Audio and Telematics
Traffic Risk areas / Danger zone Traffic information alert settings Display of messages
Press on Navigation to display the Press on Navigation to display the primary page. This series of alerts and displays is primary page. only available if Risk areas have first been downloaded and installed on the Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary page. system.
Select "Traffic messages". Select "Settings".
Choose filter settings for: Select "Alarm!" (Alert). "On the route",
It is then possible to activate Risk areas alerts then: "Around", - "Audible warning" - "Alert only when navigating" - "Alert only for overspeed" "Near destination", filters to fine- - "Display speed limits" tune the list of messages. - Timing: the choice of timing allows the time before giving a Risk areas alert to be Press again to remove the filter. defined.
Select "Confirm".
274 Audio and Telematics
Setting filters Receiving TA messages
Select the message from Press on Navigation to display the Press on Navigation to display the the list offered. primary page. primary page.
Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary page. Select the magnifying glass to have voice information. Select "Settings". Select "Settings".
TMC (Traffic Message Channel) Select "Traffic options". Select "Voice". messages on GPS-Navigation contain traffic information transmitted in real time. Select: Activate / Deactivate "Traffic - "Be advised of new messages", (TA)". - "Speak messages". Then enter the filter radius. The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function Select "Confirm". needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report is transmitted, the current audio source is interrupted We recommend a filter radius of: automatically to play the TA message. - 12 miles (20 km) in urban areas, Normal playback of the audio source - 30 miles (50 km) on motorways. resumes at the end of the transmission of the message. . 275 Audio and Telematics
Radio Media Level 1 Level 2
List of FM stations
Save
276 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Radio Media List of FM stations Press on a radio station to select it. List
FM Radio
DAB Radio
AM Radio
USB
CD Radio Media MirrorLinkTM Select change of source. Source CarPlay®
iPod
Bluetooth
AUX
Jukebox
Radio Media Press an empty location to Save it. Save . 277 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
List of FM stations
Media Photos
Copy to Jukebox Manage Jukebox
278 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Press a radio station to select it. Radio Media Save Update list Update the list of stations received. Secondary page Frequency Enter the desired radio frequency.
Radio list Confirm Save the settings.
Home screen Display the selected photo in the home page.
Rotate Rotate the photo 90°.
Radio Media Select all the photos in the list. Select all Press again to deselect. Secondary page Previous photo. Display the photos in sequence, full screen. Photos Slideshow Pause / Play. The system supports the following image formats: .gif, .jpg, .bmp, .png. Next photo.
Full screen Display the selected photo full-screen.
Sort by folder
Sort by album Choose a selection mode.
Select all Radio Media Copy Copy files to the Jukebox.
Secondary page Create folder
Rename Manage Jukebox Choose the desired function. Magnifying glass Delete
Select all Confirm Save the settings. . 279 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Media
Settings
Settings
Settings
280 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Radio Media
Secondary page Presentation of the last media used.
Media list
Shuffle (all tracks)
Media Shuffle (current album) Choose the play settings. Settings Repeat
Aux. amplification
RDS options Radio Media Radio DAB/FM station tracking Activate or deactivate the settings. Secondary page Display Radio Text Settings Digital radio slideshow Settings display
Traffic announcements (TA)
Announcements News - Weather Activate or deactivate the settings. Sport - Programm info Settings Flash - Unforeseen events Confirm Save the settings. . 281 Audio and Telematics
Radio Selecting a station Changing a radio frequency Press on Radio Media to display the Select "Save". Press on Radio Media to display the primary page. primary page.
Select "List" in the primary page. Select a preset radio station in the list. If necessary, select change of By automatic frequency search Or source. Press on Radio Media to display the primary page. Select "FM Radio". Press 3 or 4 to move the cursor for an Press on the secondary page. automatic search down or up for a radio Or frequency. "AM Radio". Select "Radio list" in the secondary THEN page.
Radio reception may be affected by Select change source. Select a radio station from the use of electrical equipment not the list offered. approved by PEUGEOT, such as a USB charger connected to the 12 V socket. Select "FM Radio". The exterior environment (hills, Select "Update list" to refresh the buildings, tunnel, car park, below list. ground...) may prevent reception, even in RDS station tracking mode. Or To select a preset radio station. This phenomenon is normal in the "AM Radio". propagation of radio waves and is in no Press on Radio Media to display the way indicative of a fault with the audio primary page. system.
282 Audio and Telematics
Presetting a station Activating / Deactivating RDS OR Select a radio station or frequency (refer to the Press on Radio Media to display the corresponding section). primary page. Press on to display the Radio Media Press on "Save" (preset). primary page. Press on the secondary page.
Press on the secondary page. Select "Settings".
Select a number in the list to preset the Press on Frequency. previously chosen radio station. A long press on a number saves (presets) the Select "Radio". station.
THEN Or Activate/deactivate "RDS options". Enter the frequency in full A press on this button presets all of (e.g.: 92.10 MHz) using the keypad the stations one after the other. RDS, if activated, allows you to continue then "Confirm". listening to the same station by automatic Recalling preset stations retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage Press on Radio Media to display the of an RDS station may not be assured primary page. Changing radio station throughout the entire country as radio Pressing the name of the current radio station stations do not cover 100 % of the Select "Save" (preset). brings up a list. territory. This explains the loss of To change radio station press the name of the reception of the station during a journey. desired station. . 283 Audio and Telematics
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio Short-cut: access to the choice of audio Display of the name of the source and the list of stations (or titles, current station. depending on the source). Select the radio station.
Any thumbnail broadcast by the station. Select the audio source. Display the "DAB" band. Manage the Jukebox. Display current action. Display of "Radiotext" for the current station. Secondary page. Next "Multiplex". Next radio station. Previous "Multiplex". Previous radio station. Preset stations, buttons 1 to 15. Display the name and Short press: select the number of the multiplex preset radio station. service being used. Long press: preset a radio station.
Display of options: If the "DAB" radio station being listened to is not if active but not available, the display will be greyed out, available on "FM", the "DAB FM" option is greyed out. if active and available, the display will be blank.
Journaline® is a text-based information service designed for digital radio systems. It provides text-based information structured around topics and sub-topics. This service is available from the "LIST OF DAB STATIONS" page.
284 Audio and Telematics
Digital radio DAB / FM auto tracking
Digital radio provides higher quality "DAB" does not cover 100% of the If "DAB/FM station tracking" is reception and also the graphical display territory. activated, there is a difference of a of current information on the radio When the digital radio signal is poor, few seconds when the system switches station being listened to. Select "List" in "DAB/FM station tracking" allows you to to "FM" analogue radio with sometimes the primary page. continue listening to the same station, a variation in volume. The range of multiplexes available is by automatically switching to the When the digital signal is restored, the displayed in alphabetical order. corresponding "FM" analogue station system automatically changes back (if there is one). to "DAB".
Press on Radio Media to display the Press on Radio Media to display the If the "DAB" station being listened to primary page. primary page. is not available on "FM" ("DAB/FM" option greyed out), or "DAB/FM station Select change of source. Press on the secondary page. tracking" is not activated, the sound will cut out while the digital signal is too weak. Select "DAB Radio". Select "Settings".
Select "List" in the primary page. Select "Radio".
or Select "Digital/FM auto Select "Radio list" in the secondary tracking" then "Confirm". page. Select the radio station from the list offered. . 285 Audio and Telematics
Media USB player Auxiliary (AUX) socket Selecting the source Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Select change of source.
Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port Connect the portable device (MP3 player…) to or connect the USB device to the USB port the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable using a suitable cable (not supplied). (not supplied).
The system builds playlists (in temporary First adjust the volume of your portable device memory), an operation which can take from (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your a few seconds to several minutes at the first audio system. Choose the source. connection. Display and management of the controls are Reduce the number of non-music files and the via the portable device. The steering mounted SRC (source) number of folders to reduce the waiting time. button can be used to go to the next The playlists are updated every time the media source, available if the source ignition is switched off or connection of a USB is active. memory stick. The lists are memorised: if they CD player Insert the CD in the player. are not modified, the subsequent loading time Press on OK to confirm the selection. will be shorter.
286 Audio and Telematics
Information and advice The audio equipment will only play audio In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT32 files with ".wma, .aac, .flac, .ogg and. mp3" CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select (file allocation table). file extensions and with a bit rate of between the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard. 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. If the disc is recorded in another format it may It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. not be played correctly. The system does not support the No other type of file (.mp4,...) can be played. It is recommended that the same recording simultaneous connection of two ".wma" files must be of the standard standard is always used for an individual disc, identical devices (two memory sticks, wma 9 type. with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) two Apple® players) but it is possible The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and for optimum sound quality. to connect one memory stick and one 48 KHz. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Apple® player at the same time. Joliet standard is recommended.
It is recommended that the USB cable It is advisable to restrict file names to for the portable device is used. The system supports USB mass 20 characters, without using of special storage devices, BlackBerry® devices characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or Apple® players via USB ports. The and displaying problems. adaptor cable is not supplied. Control of the peripheral device is with the audio system controls. Other peripherals, not recognised on connection, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not supplied). . 287 Audio and Telematics
Bluetooth® audio streaming Connecting Apple® players Streaming allows audio files on your telephone The classifications available are those to be played through the vehicle's speakers. of the portable device connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks / podcasts). Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone" The default classification used is by section, then "Bluetooth". artist. To modify the classification used, Choose the "Audio" or "All" profile. return to the first level of the menu If play does not start automatically, it may be then select the desired classification (playlists for example) and confirm necessary to start the audio playback from the Connect the Apple® player to the USB port telephone. to go down through the menu to the using a suitable cable (not supplied). desired track. Control is from the peripheral device or by Play starts automatically. using the audio system buttons.
Control is via the audio system. The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of Once connected in streaming mode, your Apple® player. the telephone is considered to be a media source. It is recommended that you activate "Repeat" on the Bluetooth peripheral.
288 Audio and Telematics
Managing the Jukebox Connect the device (MP3 player...) to the USB Select the magnifying glass to enter port or auxiliary Jack socket using a suitable the folder or album and select audio audio cable. file by audio file.
Select "Confirm" then "Copy". When no audio file is copied to the system, which has a capacity of 8 GB, all of the Jukebox function symbols are Select "New folder" to create a greyed and are not available. folder structure in the Jukebox.
Select "Media list". Or
Select "Keep structure" to retain the Select copy "Copy Jukebox". structure from the device.
While copying the system returns Select "Sort by folder". to the primary page; you can go back to the copy view at any time by selecting this button.
Or
"Sort by album". . 289 Audio and Telematics
Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Audio settings
Audio settings
Audio settings
290 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Ambience Choose the sound ambience.
Balance Sound distribution using the Arkamys® system.
Set the volume or activate the link to vehicle Sound effects Settings speed.
Audio settings Ringtones Set the telephone ringtone and volume.
Set the volume and voice for speaking street Voice names.
Confirm Save your settings.
Settings Function that turns off the display. Pressing the screen reactivates it. Turn off screen
. 291 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2
Units
Factory settings
Configuration Adjust date and time
Display screen
292 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Comments Set the units used to display distance, fuel Units consumption and temperature.
Settings Select the desired data in the list then press Delete data Delete. Secondary page Factory settings Return to factory settings. System Settings
Confirm Save the settings.
Settings
Secondary page Confirm Set the date and time then confirm.
Time/Date
Activate automatic text scrolling Settings
Secondary page Activate animations Activate or deactivate the setting then confirm.
Screen settings Confirm
. 293 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2
Choice of language
Configuration Calculator
Calendar
294 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Settings
Secondary page Confirm Select the language then confirm.
Languages
Settings
Secondary page Select the calculator.
Calculator
Settings
Secondary page Select the calendar.
Calendar
. 295 Audio and Telematics
Audio settings Press on Settings to display the The distribution (or spatialisation using On-board audio: Arkamys© Sound primary page. the Arkamys® system) of sound is an Staging optimises sound distribution in audio process that allows the audio the the passenger compartment. Select "Audio settings". quality to be adapted to the number of passengers in the vehicle. Available only with the 6-speaker Select "Ambience" configuration.
The audio settings (Ambience, Bass:, Or Treble: and Loudness) are different "Balance" and independent for each sound source. The settings for Distribution and Or Balance are common to all sources. "Sound effects"
- "Ambience" (choice of 6 musical Or ambiences) "Ringtones" - "Bass:" - "Treble:" - "Loudness" (Activate/Deactivate) - "Distribution" ("Driver", "All Or passengers", "Front only") "Voice". - "Audible response from touch screen" - "Volume linked to speed" (Activate/ Deactivate)
296 Audio and Telematics
Modifying system settings
Press on Settings to display the Press on Settings to display the Press on Settings to display the primary page. primary page. primary page.
Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary page.
Select "System Settings". Select "Screen settings". Select "Time/Date" to change the time zone, synchronisation with GPS, the time and its format, then the date.
Select "Units" to change the units Activate or deactivate "Activate of distance, fuel consumption and automatic text scrolling" and Select "Languages" to change temperature. "Activate animations". language.
Select "Delete data" to delete the list of recent destinations, personal Select "Calculator" to display a points of interest, contacts in the list. calculator.
Choose the item then select "Delete". Select "Calendar" to display a calendar.
Select "Factory settings" to return to the original settings. . 297 Audio and Telematics
Connected services Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
298 Audio and Telematics
Internet browser Press on Connected services to display the primary page.
Press on "Internet browser" to display the browser home page; first connect your smartphone by Bluetooth, "Internet" option, see the "Telephone" section.
Authentication for Internet browsing via a smartphone is done using the Dial-Up Networking (DUN) standard.
Some smartphones of the latest generation do not support this standard.
. 299 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2
Bluetooth (devices)
Usage monitor Internet connection settings
Wi-Fi connection
300 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Search Start the search for a device to connect.
Connected services Start or end the Bluetooth connection to the Connect /Disconnect selected device. Secondary page Import contacts from the selected telephone to Update save them in the audio system. Bluetooth connections Delete Delete the selected telephone.
Confirm Save the settings.
Connected services Reset Secondary page Reset the usage monitor, them confirm. Confirm Transfer rate
All Display all Wi-Fi networks.
Secure Display secure Wi-Fi networks.
Connected services Remember Memorise the selected Wi-Fi network(s). Secondary page Add Add a new Wi-Fi network. Wi-Fi connection
On/ Off Activate or deactivate a Wi-Fi network.
Select a Wi-Fi network found by the system and Connect connect to it. . 301 Audio and Telematics
MirrorLinkTM
Optional depending on the smartphone and operating system.
302 Audio and Telematics
TM Start the application on the MirrorLink smartphone As a safety measure, applications smartphone (optional, depending can only be viewed with the vehicle connection on the smartphone and operating stationary; display is interrupted once system). As a safety measure and because it the vehicle is moving. requires sustained attention by the During the procedure, several screen driver, using a smartphone when pages relating to certain functions driving is prohibited. Please note: are displayed. All operations must be done with the - if your smartphone is supported, to Accept to start and end the vehicle stationary. make it "MirrorLinkTM" compatible, connection. some phone manufacturers Once connection is established, an page nevertheless invite you to first is displayed with the applications already The synchronisation of a download a dedicated application. downloaded to your smartphone and adapted smartphone allows applications on a to MirrorLinkTM technology. smartphone that are adapted to the If only one application has been downloaded to MirrorLinkTM technology to be displayed the smartphone, it starts automatically. in the vehicle's screen. When connecting a smartphone to The principles and standards the system, it is recommended that Access to the different audio sources remains ® are constantly evolving. For the Bluetooth be started on the smartphone. accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM communication process between the display, using touch buttons in the upper bar. smartphone and the system to work Connect a USB cable. The Access to the menus for the system is possible correctly, the smartphone must be smartphone charges when at any time using the dedicated buttons. unlocked; update the operating system connected by a USB cable. of your smartphone as well as the date and time in the smartphone and the From the system, press on Voice recognition "Connected services" to display the system. Press the end of the lighting control stalk to primary page. For the list of eligible smartphones, start voice recognition of your smartphone via connect to the brand's internet website the system. Press on "MirrorLinkTM" to in your country. Voice recognition requires a compatible start the application in the smartphone connected to the vehicle by system. Bluetooth. . 303 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
304 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Access or return to the applications already downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to MirrorLinkTM technology.
Access to a menu list depending on the Connected application chosen. services "Back": abandon the current operation, go up one level. MirrorLinkTM "Home": access or return to the "Car mode" page.
Access to the "Connected services" primary page.
. 305 Audio and Telematics
CarPlay®
306 Audio and Telematics
CarPlay® smartphone connection Connect a USB cable. The As a safety measure and because it Voice recognition smartphone charges when requires sustained attention by the Press the end of the lighting control stalk to connected by a USB cable. driver, using a smartphone when start voice recognition of your smartphone via driving is prohibited. On connecting the USB cable, the the system. All operations must be done with the "Telephone" function changes to vehicle stationary. "CarPlay" in the menu carrousel. Press on "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® interface. The synchronisation of a smartphone allows applications on a Or smartphone that are adapted to the CarPlay® technology to be displayed in Connect the USB cable. The the vehicle's screen. smartphone is charged while As the principles and standards are connected by the USB cable. constantly evolving, it is recommended that you update the operating system of From the system, press on your smartphone. "Connected services" to display the For the list of eligible smartphones, primary page. connect to the brand's internet website Press on "CarPlay" to display the in your country. CarPlay® interface.
As a safety measure, applications During the procedure, one or more can only be viewed with the vehicle screen pages relating to certain stationary; display is interrupted once functions are displayed on connection. the vehicle is moving. . 307 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
308 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Favourites
Calls The "Telephone" function is placed automatically in "Siri" voice mode. Telephone Contacts Press on "Display contacts" for access to the Keypad telephone menus.
Messages
Lists
Artists Press on "Music" to browse and select the tracks on your smartphone. Music Tracks Press on "Playing" for access to the track Albums currently playing. Connected services Other... Apple® CarPlay®
Press on "Destinations" to search for an address by "Siri" voice command or by using the keypad. Plan Destinations The GPS function is through the telephone's 3G, 4G or Wi-Fi internet connection.
The "Messages" function is place automatically in "Siri" voice mode to speak the message and Messages Display messages the addressee. Press on "Display messages" for access to the messages.
Playing Access to the track currently playing. . 309 Audio and Telematics
Telephone
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Call log
Contacts
310 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments All calls
Incoming calls
Outgoing calls Telephone Contacts After making choices, start the call. Call log View Magnifying glass Create
Call
Addresses
Create
Modify
Delete View Telephone Delete all After making choices, start the call. Contacts By name
Confirm
Navigate to
Search for contact
Call . 311 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Bluetooth (devices)
Telephone connection Devices detected
Telephone Options
312 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Start the search for another peripheral device to Search connect. Telephone Start or stop the Bluetooth connection to the connection Connect / Disconnect selected peripheral device. Secondary page Import the contacts from the selected telephone Update to store them in the audio system. Bluetooth connection Delete Delete the selected telephone. Confirm Save the settings.
Telephone Telephone connection
Secondary page Devices detected Audio streaming Start the search for peripheral devices.
Search for Internet devices Cut the microphone temporarily so that the Put on hold contact cannot hear your conversation with a passenger. Telephone Import the contacts from the selected telephone Update connection to save then in the audio system.
Secondary page Ringtones Choose the telephone ringtone and volume.
Telephone Options Contact records used and free, percentage of Memory info. storage space used by internal contacts and Bluetooth contacts. Confirm Save the settings. . 313 Audio and Telematics
Pairing a Bluetooth® telephone
For reasons of safety and because they Procedure from the system require prolonged attention on the part Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function Select the name of the of the driver, the operations for pairing and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone desired peripheral from the the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the configuration). list and "Confirm". hands-free system of the audio system must be carried out with the vehicle Press on Telephone to display the stationary. primary page. Enter a code of at least 4 figures for the connection then "Confirm".
Procedure (short) from the Press on the secondary page. telephone Enter this same code in the telephone then In the Bluetooth menu of your device, select the accept the connection. system name in the list of devices detected. Select "Bluetooth connection". The system offers to connect the telephone: - in "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone Enter a code of at least 4 figures in the device only), and confirm. Select "Search for devices". - in "Audio streaming" (streaming: wireless The list of telephones detected is playing of audio files from the telephone), Enter this same code in the system, displayed. - in "Internet" (internet browsing, only if your select "OK" and confirm. telephone is compatible with the "DUN" Dial-Up Networking Bluetooth standard). If the telephone is not detected, it is Select one or more profiles and confirm. recommended that you switch the Bluetooth function on your telephone off and then on again.
314 Audio and Telematics
Connecting a Bluetooth® peripheral device Automatic reconnection On switching on the ignition, the telephone The services available depend on Depending on the type of telephone, connected when the ignition was last switched the network, the SIM card and the the system will ask you to accept or not off is automatically reconnected, if this compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone the transfer of your contacts. connection mode had been activated during the used. Check the telephone manual and If not, select "Update". pairing procedure. with your network provider for details of The connection is confirmed by the display of a the services available to you. message and the name of the telephone. Manual connection On return to the vehicle, if the last telephone The ability of the system to connect Press on Telephone to display the connected is present again, it is reconnected with only one profile depends on the primary page. automatically and within around 30 seconds telephone. The three profiles may all after switching on the ignition the pairing is connect by default. done without any action on your part, with Press on the secondary page. (Bluetooth activated). Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information To modify the automatic connection mode, (compatibility, additional help, ...). select the telephone in the list then select the Select "Bluetooth" to display the list desired profile. of paired peripherals. The recognised telephone appears in the list. Select the peripheral to connect.
Press on "Search for devices".
Depending on your telephone, you may be asked to accept automatic connection every The connection is confirmed by the display of a time the ignition is switched on. message and the name of the telephone. . 315 Audio and Telematics
Managing paired Receiving a call Making a call telephones An incoming call is announced by a ring and a This function allows the connection or Using the telephone is not superimposed display in the screen. disconnection of a peripheral device as recommended while driving. well as the deletion of a pairing. Make a short press on the steering Park the vehicle. Make the call using the steering mounted TEL button to accept an Press on Telephone to display the incoming call. mounted controls. primary page. Make a long press Calling a new number Press on the secondary page. Press on Telephone to display the on the steering mounted TEL button primary page. Select "Bluetooth" to display the list to reject the call. of paired peripheral devices. Enter the phone number using the digital keypad. Or Select the peripheral in the list. Press "Call" to start the call. Select " ". Select "Search for devices" End call Calling a contact Press on Telephone to display the Or primary page. "Connect / Disconnect" to start or end the Bluetooth connection with the selected device. Or make a long press
Or "Delete" to delete the pairing. on the steering mounted TEL button.
316 Audio and Telematics
Managing contacts / entries
Select "Contacts". Press on Telephone to display the Select "By name" to view the list of primary page. contacts.
Select the desired contact from the list offered. Select "Contacts".
Select "Call".
Select "View".
Calling a recently used number Select "Create" to add a new contact.
Press on Telephone to display the primary page. Or "Modify" to edit the selected contact. Select "Call log".
Or Select the desired contact from the list offered. "Delete" to delete the selected contact. It is always possible to make a call directly from the telephone; park the Or vehicle first as a safety measure. "Delete all" to delete all information for the selected contact. . 317 Audio and Telematics
Frequently asked questions The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system. Navigation
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION The route calculation is not The route settings may conflict with the current location (exclusion of Check the route settings in the "Navigation" successful. toll roads on a toll motorway). menu.
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The Risk areas audible The audible warning is not active. Activate audible warnings in the "Navigation" warning does not work. menu.
The system does not The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages. Select the "Information" function in the list of route suggest a detour around an settings. incident on the route.
I receive a Risk areas alert Other than guidance, the system announces all Risk areas Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of which is not on my route. positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an the Risk areas. Select "On the route" to no longer alert for Risk areas located on nearby or parallel roads. receive alerts other than navigation instructions or to reduce the time for the announcement.
318 Audio and Telematics
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION Certain traffic jams along On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive Wait until the traffic information is being received the route are not indicated the traffic information. correctly (display of the traffic information icons in real time. on the map).
The filters are too restrictive. Modify the settings.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for This phenomenon is normal. The system is the traffic information. dependent on the traffic information available.
The altitude is not On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to Wait until the system has started up completely so displayed. receive more than 4 satellites correctly. that there is GPS coverage by at least 4 satellites.
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the This phenomenon is normal. The system weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary. is dependent on the GPS signal reception conditions.
. 319 Audio and Telematics
Radio
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION The quality of reception of The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station Activate the "RDS" function by means of the the radio station listened listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area short-cut menu to enable the system to check to gradually deteriorates through which the vehicle is travelling. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in or the stored stations do the geographical area. not function (no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...). The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate block reception, including in RDS mode. a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer. through a car wash or into an underground car park).
I cannot find some radio The station is not received or its name has changed in the list. Press and hold the "List" button at the steering stations in the list of mounted controls to update the list of stations stations received. received or press on the system update function: Some radio stations send other information in place of their name "Update list". (the title of the song for example). The name of the radio The system interprets this information as the name of the station. station changes.
320 Audio and Telematics
Media
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION Playback of my USB Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down Delete the files supplied with the memory stick memory stick starts only access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the and limit the number of sub-folders in the file after a very long wait catalogue time). structure on the memory stick. (around 2 to 3 minutes).
When I connect my iPhone When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port as a telephone and to the the streaming function. The streaming function takes the place of (the USB function takes priority over streaming). USB port at the same time, the USB function which is then not useable, there is a period without I am unable to play the sound of the track being played with Apple® players. music files.
The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any Check that the CD is inserted in the player the automatically or is not audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. right way up. played by the player. Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the player (udf...). played if it is too badly damaged. Check the content in the case of a recorded CD: The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is refer to the advice in the "AUDIO" section. not recognised by the audio system. The audio system's CD player does not play DVDs. Some recorded CDs will not be played by the audio system because they are not of adequate quality.
There is a long waiting When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain This phenomenon is normal. period following the insertion amount of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few of a CD or connection of a seconds to a few minutes. USB memory stick. . 321 Audio and Telematics
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable poor. conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting unsuitable. an ambience.
Some characters in the The audio system does not display some types of characters. Use standard characters to name tracks and media information are not folders. displayed correctly while playing.
Playing of streaming files The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device. does not start.
The names of tracks and The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information. the track length are not displayed on the screen when streaming audio.
322 Audio and Telematics
Settings
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION In changing the setting The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the balance settings. Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain of treble and bass the Modifying one without the other is not possible. the desired musical ambience. equalizer setting is deselected.
In changing the equalizer setting, treble and bass return to zero.
When changing the The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings. Modify the balance or distribution settings to balance settings, the Modifying one without the other is not possible. obtain the desired musical ambience. distribution setting is deselected.
When changing an distribution setting, the balance setting is deselected.
. 323 Audio and Telematics
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Loudness, Check that the audio settings (Loudness, sound quality between the Ambience, Treble, Bass, Volume can be adapted to the different Ambience, Treble, Bass, Volume) are adapted to different audio sources. sound sources, which may result in audible differences when the sources listened to. Adjust Balance, Treble changing source. and Bass to the middle position, select the "None" musical ambience and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
With the engine off, the When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery system switches off after a depends on the state of charge of the battery. charge. few minutes of use. The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
324 Audio and Telematics
Telephone
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION I cannot connect my The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is Bluetooth telephone. telephone may not be visible. switched on. Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. You can check the compatibility of your telephone at www.peugeot.co.uk (services).
The volume of the The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system, to telephone connected maximum if required, and increase the volume of in Bluetooth mode is the telephone if necessary. inaudible. The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of Reduce the ambient noise level (close the telephone communication. windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow down...). Some contacts are The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display duplicated in the list. contacts on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. telephone contacts". When both synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.
Contacts are not shown in Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings Modify the display setting in the telephone alphabetical order. chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order. directory.
The system does not The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages receive SMS text messages. to the system. . 325
Audio and Telematics
Audio system / Bluetooth®
Contents First steps 328 Steering mounted controls 329 Radio 330 Media 332 Telephone 336 Audio settings 339 Configuration 340 Screen menu map(s) 341 Frequently asked questions 342
As a safety measure, the driver must only carry out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary. When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the system switches off after activation of energy economy mode.
. 327 Audio and Telematics
First steps
On / Off, volume adjustment. Automatic search for a lower radio Automatic search for a higher radio frequency. frequency. Select the previous CD, USB track. Select the next CD, USB track. Navigation in a list. Navigation in a list. Press and hold: fast back. Press and hold: fast forward. Select the source: Radio: FM1, FM2, AM, CD, USB, Open the main menu. AUX, Streaming. Telephone: accept an incoming call. Telephone, press and hold: end Display the list of stations received, Select a preset radio station. a call, access the calls log for the the CD/USB tracks or folders. Radio, press and hold: preset a radio connected telephone. Press and hold: update the list of stations received. station. Other than radio: see the corresponding sections. Adjust audio settings: sound ambience, treble, bass, loudness, Abandon the current operation. Eject CD. distribution, left/right balance, front/ Go up one level (menu or folder). rear balance, automatic volume.
328 Audio and Telematics
Steering mounted controls Radio: select the previous / next Radio: automatic search for a lower preset station. frequency. CD / USB: select the genre / CD / MP3 / USB: select the previous artist / folder / playlist from the list track. depending on classification. CD / USB: press and hold: fast back. Select the previous / next item in a menu.
Radio: automatic search for a higher Volume increase. frequency. CD / MP3 / USB: select the next track. CD / USB: press and hold: fast Volume decrease. forward.
Change the audio sound. Mute: cut the sound by Confirm a selection. simultaneously pressing the volume Start/end call with the telephone. increase and decrease buttons. Press and hold: access to the Restore the sound: by pressing one call log. of the two volume buttons.
. 329 Audio and Telematics
Radio Presetting a station Managing a list Entering a frequency Press SRC/TEL repeatedly to select Press LIST to display the list of Press on MENU. the FM1, FM2 or AM waveband. stations received in alphabetical order.
Select "Radio". Press and hold one of the buttons to Select the desired radio station using preset the station being listened to. one of the buttons. The name of the station is displayed and an audible signal confirms the Select "Write freq.". preset. Confirm with "OK".
Press +. The exterior environment (hills, buildings, tunnel, car park, below ground...) may Briefly press one of the buttons to prevent reception, even in RDS station change to the next or previous letter. tracking (alternative frequencies) mode. This or phenomenon is normal in the propagation of radio waves and is in no way indicative of a press - to select the desired fault with the audio system. Press and hold on LIST to build or frequency. update the list of stations; audio reception is cut momentarily. Confirm with "OK". Selecting a station Press a button to listen to the corresponding preset station.
330 Audio and Telematics
RDS Receiving TA messages Displaying RADIO TEXT
RDS, if activated, enables you to continue The TA (Traffic Announcement) Radio text is information transmitted by listening to the same station by automatic function gives priority to TA alert the radio station related to the current retuning to alternative frequencies. messages. To operate, this function programme or song. However, in certain conditions, coverage needs good reception of a radio station of an RDS station may not be assured transmitting this type of message. throughout the country as radio stations When a traffic report is transmitted, do not cover 100 % of the territory. This the current audio source (Radio, CD, With the radio displayed on the explains the loss of reception of the USB, ...) is interrupted automatically to screen, press MENU. station during a journey. play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message. Select "Radio". With source FM1 or FM2, press MENU. Press MENU. Select or deselect "TXT" to activate or deactivate the display of Radio Select "Radio". Text. Select "Radio". Confirm with "OK" to save the setting. Select or deselect "RDS" to switch RDS on or off. Select or deselect "TA" to activate or deactivate the reception of traffic Confirm with "OK" to save the messages. setting. Confirm with "OK" to save the setting. . 331 Audio and Telematics
Media USB player This unit comprises a USB port Press LIST to display the structure of and a Jack auxiliary socket, the folders in the compilation. depending on model. Select a line in the list.
Confirm with "OK".
The system constitutes playlists (in Connect a USB memory stick to the USB port temporary memory) the creation time or connect a USB device to the USB port using for which can be from a few seconds to a suitable cable (not supplied). Up a level in the menu. several minutes at the first connection. Limiting the number of non-music files Press SRC/TEL repeatedly to and the number of folders reduces this select "USB". waiting time. The playlists are updated every time the ignition is switched off or Press MENU. a USB memory stick is connected. Press one of these buttons to select The lists are memorised: if there is no the next or previous track in the list. change in the lists, the next loading Select "Media". time will be shorter. Press one of these buttons to select the next or previous folder in the Select or deselect "TA" to switch order chosen. traffic announcements on or off. At a first connection, the order suggested is by folder. When Press and hold one of these buttons connecting again, the order previously Select the play mode: "Normal", for fast forward or back. chosen is retained. "Random", "Random all" or "Repeat".
332 Audio and Telematics
Auxiliary socket (AUX) CD player Insert a CD into the player, play starts Press LIST to display the folder automatically. structure of the compilation. Insert an MP3 compilation CD into the CD player. Select a line in the list. The audio system searches for audio tracks, which can take from a few to several dozen seconds before play starts. Confirm with "OK". Connect the portable device (MP3 player...) to the Jack auxiliary socket using an audio cable (not supplied). Press the SRC/TEL button Press SRC/TEL repeatedly to repeatedly to select "CD". Return to the top level of the folder structure to select "AUX". select the type of tracks. - By Folders (CD or USB): all folders Press one of these buttons to go to containing audio files recognised on the First adjust the volume on the portable device the previous or next track in the list. peripheral device, in alphabetical order (to a high level). Then adjust the volume on without following the folder structure. your audio system. Control is from the portable - By Artist (USB only): all of the artist names device. defined in the ID3 Tags, in alphabetical Press one of these buttons to select order. the previous or next folder according - By Genre (USB only): all of the genres to the category chosen. Do not connect a given device to both defined in the ID3 Tags. the Jack auxiliary socket and the USB - By Playlist (CD or USB): if playlists have port at the same time. been saved. Press and hold one of these buttons for fast forward or back. . 333 Audio and Telematics
Information and advice The audio system will only play files with The playlists accepted on CD, MP3, iPod and Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT32 ".mp3", ".wma" and ".wav" on a CD and can USB connection are types ".m3u" and ".wpl". (File Allocation Table). play files with ".ogg" extension only on USB. The number of files recognised is limited to 5 000 in 500 folders on a maximum of 8 levels. The use of genuine Apple® USB cables is recommended to ensure correct operation. It is recommended that file names be of no On a single disc, the CD player can read up more than 20 characters and avoiding special to 255 MP3 files spread over 8 folder levels characters (ex: " ? ; ù) so as to avoid any with a maximum of 192 folders. However, it is problem reading or displaying the files. recommended that this be kept to 2 levels so as to limit the time taken to access and play the CD. In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or During play, the folder structure is not CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select observed. standards ISO 9660 level 1. 2 or Joliet. If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played correctly. Do not connect a hard disk or USB device other It is recommended that the same recording than audio players to the USB port. This may standard is always used for an individual disc, cause damage to your installation. with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended.
334 Audio and Telematics
Bluetooth® audio streaming Connecting Apple® players Streaming allows music files on a telephone to Activate the streaming source by be heard via the vehicle's speakers. pressing the SRC/TEL* button.
Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone" Control of playback is via the audio system. The control section. of common tracks is possible via the audio system control buttons and the steering mounted controls**. Contextual information can be displayed in the screen. In the "Bluetooth: Audio" menu, select the telephone to connect. The audio quality depends on the quality of the Connect the Apple® player to the USB port The audio system connects automatically to a transmission from the telephone. using a suitable cable (not supplied). newly paired telephone. Play starts automatically. * In certain cases, the play of audio files must be initiated from the keypad. Management of the device is via the audio ** If the telephone supports the function. system controls.
The classifications available are those on the portable player connected (artists / albums / genres / playlist s/ audiobooks / podcasts).
The software version of the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of your Apple® player. . 335 Audio and Telematics
Telephone Pairing a Bluetooth® telephone A virtual keypad is displayed on the For safety reasons and because they A window is displayed with "Searching screen: choose a 4 digit code. require prolonged attention on the part device". of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth mobile telephone Confirm with "OK". with the Bluetooth hands-free system The services available depend on of your audio system must be carried the network, the SIM card and the out with the vehicle stationary and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone ignition on. used. A message is displayed in the screen of the Consult your telephone's manual and telephone: enter the same code and confirm. your operator to find out which services Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information are available to you. If pairing fails, try again; the number of attempts is not limited. (compatibility, more help, ...). A message appears in the screen to confirm Select the telephone to be paired the result of the connection. Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and from the list. ensure that it is set as visible to all (refer to the Pairing can also be initiated from the telephone instructions). Confirm with "OK". telephone by searching for detected Bluetooth devices. Press the MENU button.
Only one telephone can be paired at a time. The directory and the calls list can be accessed after the synchronisation Select "Bluetooth". period (if the telephone is compatible). In some cases, the Bluetooth address of the Automatic connection must be telephone may appear instead of the name of configured in the telephone to allow the telephone. the connection each time the vehicle is Select "Search". started.
336 Audio and Telematics
Managing connections Making a call Press the MENU button. Select or deselect: From the directory - "Tel.": hands-free connection Press the MENU button. - "Audio": play audio files
Select "Bluetooth". "OK" to confirm the choice. Select "Telephone".
Select "BT management" and confirm. The list of paired telephones "Delete" to delete the pairing. Select "Call". is displayed.
Indicates connection of the audio Select "Directory". profile. It is not possible to pair more than 5 telephones. Press MENU and Indicates connection of the select "Bluetooth". Select "BT Select the desired number. hands-free profile. management". If 5 telephones are already paired, select the telephone to delete by pressing "OK" and selecting "Delete" (refer to the "Managing Confirm with "OK" to start the call. In the list, select a telephone to pair. connections" section).
Confirm with "OK". . 337 Audio and Telematics
Making a call Receiving a call Recently called numbers* Press and hold SRC/TEL to display Press one of these buttons to go to An incoming call is announced by a ring and a the calls list. the previous or next page in the list. superimposed display in the screen.
Press SRC/TEL. For access to the calls list, it is also "OK" starts the call. possible to press MENU, select "Telephone", then select "Call", and or finally select "Calls list". select "YES" to accept the call,
The calls list includes the calls sent from and by from the vehicle via the or In the list of calls, select the number connected telephone. select "NO" to reject the call. and choose "Missed calls", "Dialed It is possible to make a call directly from calls" or "Answered calls". the telephone; stop the vehicle as a safety measure.
Scroll through the calls list. Pressing and holding the back button,
or Confirm with "OK". on SRC/TEL also rejects an incoming call.
* D epending on the compatibility of the telephone. 338 Audio and Telematics
Audio settings Managing calls Hang up Combined mode Press ¯ to display the audio settings menu. In the contextual menu, select "Hang (to leave the vehicle without ending the call) Press ¯ to go to the next setting. up" to end the call. From the contextual menu:
Pressing and holding on SRC/TEL Select "Combined mode" to transfer The settings available are: also ends the call. the call to the telephone. - AMBIANCE: BASS, TREBLE and LOUDNESS. Select "Combined mode" to transfer - BALANCE (left/right balance), FADER the call to the vehicle. (front/rear balance) Secret - Mute - SOUND DIST. (driver or passenger). - AUTO VOLUME. (so that the caller cannot hear)
In certain cases, the combined mode has In the contextual menu: to activated from the telephone. The distribution, or spatialisation of sound, The Bluetooth connection will be restored Select "Micro OFF" to switch off the is an audio process which allows the automatically if the ignition has been microphone. sound quality to be improved according to switched off, then on again (depending on the setting chosen, corresponding to the the compatibility of the telephone). position of the listeners in the vehicle. Select "Micro OFF" to switch the microphone on again.
The AMBIANCE, TREBLE and BASS audio settings are different and independent for each sound source. . 339 Audio and Telematics
Configuration Display and language settings Press the MENU button.
Select "Config.".
Select "Displaying" to activate or deactivate scrolling text.
Select "Language" to modify the display language.
Select "Version" for information on the software.
Select "System" when you want to install an update. Information can be obtained from a PEUGEOT dealer.
Select "Unit" to modify the units for temperature (Celsius, Fahrenheit).
340 Audio and Telematics
Screen menu map(s) MENU Language Radio Telephone 2 1 1 Deutsch TA Call 3 2 2 English 3 RDS Directory 2 3 Español 3 TXT Calls list 2 3 Français 3 Write freq. Missed calls 2 4 Italiano 3 Dialed calls 4 Nederlands Media 3 1 Answered calls 4 Português 3 Normal Phone status 2 2 Português-Brasil 3 Random 2 Bluetooth Русский 1 3 Random all Türkçe 2 BT management 3 2 Repeat Version 2 Search 2 2 TA System 2 Config. 2 1 Unit 2 Displaying 2 Celsius 3 Scrolling text 3 Fahrenheit 3 . 341 Audio and Telematics
Frequently asked questions The following tables contain answers to the most frequently asked questions.
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (volume, bass, Check that the audio settings (volume, bass, sound quality between the treble, ambience, loudness) can be adapted to the different sound treble, ambience, loudness) are adapted to the different audio sources sources, which may result in audible differences when changing sources listened to. It is advisable to adjust (radio, CD...). source (radio, CD...). audio settings (bass, treble, Front-Rear balance, Left-Right balance) to the middle position, select the musical ambience and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
When changing the Choosing an ambience imposes settings for treble and bass. Modify the treble and bass settings or the settings for treble and Modifying one without the other is only possible with a personalised ambience setting to obtain the desired sound bass, the ambience setting ambience. quality. is deselected. When changing the ambience setting, treble and bass are reset to zero.
When changing the Choosing the "driver" distribution setting imposes a balance setting. Modify the balance setting or the distribution balance setting, setting to obtain the desired sound quality. distribution is deselected.
342 Audio and Telematics
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION The quality of reception of The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station Activate the RDS function to enable the system the radio station listened listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area to check whether there is a more powerful to gradually deteriorates through which the vehicle is travelling. transmitter in the geographical area. or the stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed...). The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) This phenomenon is normal and does not block reception, including in RDS mode. indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer. through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Sound cut-outs of 1 to During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon 2 seconds in radio mode. permitting better reception of the station. is too frequent and always on the same route.
Traffic announcement The radio station does not broadcast traffic information. Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic TA is displayed. I do information. not receive any traffic information.
The stored stations are not An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the SRC/TEL button to return to the found (no sound, waveband (FM1 or FM2) on which the stations 87.5 MHz is displayed...). are stored. . 343 Audio and Telematics
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain - Check that the CD is inserted in the player automatically or is not any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot the right way up. played by the player. play. - Check the condition of the CD: the CD The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is cannot be played if it is too damaged. not recognised by the audio equipment. - Check the content in the case of a recorded CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section. - The audio equipment's CD player does not play DVDs. - Due to their quality level, certain writeable CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in poor. suitable conditions.
The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambience.
The Bluetooth connection The battery of the peripheral may not be sufficiently charged. Recharge the battery of the peripheral device. is cut.
The message "USB device The USB memory stick is not recognised. Use only USB memory sticks formatted to FAT32 error" is displayed on the (28-bit file allocation table). screen.
A telephone connects Automatic connection overrides manual connection. Modify the telephone settings to remove automatically, automatic connection. disconnecting another telephone.
344 Audio and Telematics
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION An iPod is not recognised The iPod is of a generation that is not compatible with the USB when connecting to the connection. USB port.
The hard disk or device Some hard disks and devices need a power supply greater than is Connect the device to the 230 V socket, the 12 V is not recognised when provided by the audio system. socket or an external power supply. connecting to the USB Caution: ensure that the device does not port. transmit a voltage greater than 5 V (risk of destruction of the system).
When streaming, the Some telephones prioritise connection of the "hands-free" profile. Delete the "hands-free" connection profile to sound cuts momentarily. improve streaming.
In "Random all" play, not In "Random all" play, the system can only take into account up all of the tracks are played. to 999 tracks.
With the engine off, the When the engine is switched off, the audio system operating time Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery audio system switches off depends on the battery charge. charge. after a few minutes of use. The switch-off is normal: the audio system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging the vehicle's battery.
The message "the audio In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to system is overheated" is too high, the audio system switches to an automatic thermal allow the system to cool. appears on the display. protection mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing of the CD. . 345
Audio and Telematics
Audio system
Contents First steps 348 Steering mounted controls 349 Radio 350 Media 352 Audio settings 354 Screen menu map(s) 355 Frequently asked questions 356
As a safety measure, the driver must only carry out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary. When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the system switches off after activation of economy mode.
. 347 Audio and Telematics
First steps
On / Off, volume adjustment. Display the list of stations received, Automatic search step by step for a the CD/MP3 tracks or folders. higher radio frequency. Press and hold: update the list of Select the next CD track. stations received. Navigation in a list. Press and hold: fast forward. Selection of source: FM1, FM2, AM, CD, AUX. Manual search step by step for a Open the main menu. higher radio frequency. Select the next MP3 track. Adjust audio settings: Navigation in a list. sound ambience, treble, bass, loudness, left/right balance, Manual search step by step for a Select a preset radio station. automatic volume. lower radio frequency. Radio, press and hold: preset a radio Select the previous MP3 track. station. Navigation in a list. Automatic search for a lower/higher radio frequency. Select the next CD track. Abandon the current operation. Eject CD. Navigation in a list. Go up one level (menu or folder). Press and hold: fast forward or back.
348 Audio and Telematics
Steering mounted controls Radio: select the previous / next Radio: automatic search for a lower preset station. frequency. Select the previous / next item in CD / MP3: select the previous track. a menu. CD: press and hold: fast back.
Radio: automatic search for a higher Volume up. frequency. CD / MP3: select the next track. CD: press and hold: fast forward. Volume down.
Change audio source. Mute on: cut the sound by Confirm a selection. simultaneously pressing the volume up and down buttons. Mute off: press one of the volume buttons.
. 349 Audio and Telematics
Radio Presetting a station Managing the list RDS Press the SRC/BAND button Press LIST to display the list of RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue repeatedly to select the FM1, FM2 or stations received, in alphabetical listening to the same station by automatic AM waveband. order. retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage Press and hold a button to preset the Select the desired radio station by by an RDS station may not be assured station being listened to. The name pressing one of the buttons. throughout the country as radio stations of the station is displayed and an do not cover 100 % of the territory. This audible signal confirms that it has explains the loss of reception of the been preset. station during a journey. Confirm with OK.
Press MENU. The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car Briefly press one of the buttons to parks) may block reception, including change to the next or previous letter. in RDS mode. This is a normal effect Select "Radio". of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any failure of the audio equipment. Press and hold on LIST to construct Confirm with OK. or update the list of stations; the sound is interrupted temporarily.
Selecting a station Select "RDS".
Press a button to listen to the corresponding preset station. Confirm with OK.
350 Audio and Telematics
Receiving TA messages Select "On" or "Off" to switch RDS Select "On" or "Off" to switch The TA (Traffic Announcement) on or off. on or off the reception of traffic function gives priority to TA alert announcements. messages. To operate, this function Confirm with OK. needs good reception of a radio station Confirm with OK. transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.
Press MENU.
Select "Radio".
Confirm with OK.
Select "Traffic TA". Confirm with OK. . 351 Audio and Telematics
Media Display RADIO TEXT Auxiliary socket (AUX) CD player Insert a CD into the player, play starts Radio Text is information transmitted automatically. by the radio station on the station or on Insert an MP3 compilation in the CD player. the song being played. The audio system searches for audio tracks, which can take from a few to several dozen seconds before play starts. Press MENU.
Connect the portable device (MP3 player...) to the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable Select . "Radio" (not supplied). Press the SRC/BAND button Press the SRC/BAND button repeatedly to select "CD". Confirm with OK. repeatedly and select "AUX".
Press one of these buttons to select First adjust the volume on your portable device a track in the list. Select "INFO TEXT". (to a high level). The adjust the volume on your audio system. Control is from the portable device. Press one of these buttons to select Confirm with OK. the previous or next folder according to the category chosen.
Select "On" or "Off" to switch radio text on or off. Press and hold one of these buttons for fast forward or back. Confirm with OK.
352 Audio and Telematics
Playing a compilation Play mode Press LIST to display the folder Go back to the first level to select the track Press MENU. structure for the compilation. classification: - By Folders: all folders containing audio files recognised on the peripheral device, Select a line in the list. in alphabetical order, ignoring the folder Select "Media". structure. - By Playlist: depending on the playlists saved. Confirm with "OK". Confirm with OK.
Select the desired play mode. Jump a page. The play modes available are: - Normal: the tracks are played in order, depending on the Confirm with OK to save the Select a folder / Playlist. classification of the selected files. - Random: the tracks in an album changes. or folder are played in a random order. Start play of the chosen track. - Random all: all of the tracks saved in the media ar played in random order. - Repeat: the tracks played are only Go up one level. those from the current album or folder. . 353 Audio and Telematics
Audio settings Information and advice The audio system can only play files with Playlists accepted are types .m3u and .pls. Press ¯ to display the audio settings ".mp3", ".wma" or ".wav" extensions. The system can recognise up to 5 000 files in menu. 500 folders on 8 levels. The settings available are: - AMBIANCE, It is advisable to restrict file names to On a given disc, the CD player can read up to - BASS, 20 characters without using special characters 255 MP3 files spread over 8 levels. However, - TREBLE, (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying it is advisable to keep to a limit of two levels - LOUDNESS, problems. to reduce the access time before the CD is - BALANCE (L/R), played. - AUTO VOLUME. The folder structure is not observed during playback. Select the settings to adjust.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select Confirm with OK. standards ISO 9660 level 1. 2 or Joliet. If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played correctly. It is recommended that the same recording Adjust the setting. standard is always used for a given disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality. Confirm with OK. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended.
The AMBIANCE, TREBLE and BASS settings are different and independent for each sound source.
354 Audio and Telematics
Screen menu map(s) MENU Radio Displaying 1 1
Traffic SCROLLING 2 2
RDS 2
TEXT INFO 2 Unit 1
Media Celsius 1 2
Fahrenheit Play 2 2
Normal 3
Random 3
Random all Language 3 1
Repeat 3
TEXT INFO 2 . 355 Audio and Telematics
Frequently asked questions The following tables contain answers to the most frequently asked questions.
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass, sound quality between the Treble, Ambiance, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound Treble, Ambiance, Loudness) are adapted to different audio sources sources, which may result in audible differences when changing the sources listened to. It is advisable to set (radio, CD...). source (radio, CD...). the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear Fader, Left-Right Balance) to the middle position, select the musical ambience "None" and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
When changing the Choosing an ambiance imposes settings for treble and bass. Modify the treble and bass settings or the settings for treble and Modifying one without the other is not possible. ambiance setting to obtain the desired sound bass, the ambiance setting quality. is deselected. When changing the ambiance setting, treble and bass are reset to zero.
356 Audio and Telematics
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION The quality of reception of The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station Switch on the RDS function to enable the system the radio station listened listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area to check whether there is a more powerful to gradually deteriorates through which the vehicle is travelling. transmitter in the geographical area. or the stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed...). The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) This phenomenon is normal and does not block reception, including in RDS mode. indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer. through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Sound cut-outs of 1 to During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency Switch off the RDS function if the phenomenon is 2 seconds in radio mode. permitting better reception of the station. too frequent and always on the same route.
The traffic announcement The radio station does not broadcast traffic information. Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic (TA) is displayed. I do information. not receive any traffic information.
The stored stations are not An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the SRC button to return to the waveband found (no sound, 87.5 MHz (AM, FM1, FM2) on which the stations are stored. is displayed...). . 357 Audio and Telematics
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain - Check that the CD is inserted in the player automatically or is not any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot the right way up. played by the player. play. - Check the condition of the CD: the CD The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is cannot be played if it is too damaged. not recognised by the audio equipment. - Check the content in the case of a recorded CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section. - The audio system's CD player does not play DVDs. - Due to their quality level, certain writeable CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in poor. suitable conditions.
The audio settings (bass, treble, ambiance) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambiance.
In "Random all" play, not In "Random all" play, the system can only take into account up to all of the tracks are played. 999 tracks.
With the engine off, the When the engine is switched off, the audio system operating time Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery audio system switches off depends on the battery charge. charge. after a few minutes of use. The switch-off is normal: the audio system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging the vehicle's battery.
The message "the audio In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to system is overheated" is too high, the audio system switches to an automatic thermal allow the system to cool. appears on the display. protection mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing of the CD.
358 Alphabetical index
A B Accessories...... 134, 231 Battery...... 214, 240 Checks...... 235-241 Active City Brake...... 145 Battery, charging...... 216 Child lock...... 169 AdBlue®...... 24, 175, 180 Battery, remote control...... 46, 47 Child seats ...... 161-168 Adjusting headlamps...... 124 Blind...... 133 Child seats, conventional...... 161 Adjusting head restraints...... 57 BlueHDi...... 175 Child seats, ISOFIX...... 165-168 Adjusting seats...... 56 Bluetooth (telephone)...... 314, 336 Cleaning (advice)...... 230 Adjusting the air distribution...... 66, 69 Bonnet...... 234 Closing the boot...... 50 Adjusting the air flow...... 65, 69 Boot...... 50, 75 Closing the doors...... 48 Adjusting the date...... 42 Brake discs...... 241 Connected services...... 298 Adjusting the height and reach Brake lamps...... 206 Connection, Bluetooth...... 300, 314, 335 of the steering wheel...... 59 Brake pads...... 241 Connection, MirrorLink...... 302 Adjusting the seat belt height...... 149 Brake warning lamp...... 22 Connection, Wi-Fi network...... 300 Adjusting the temperature...... 65, 68 Braking assistance system...... 140 Control, electric windows...... 54 Adjusting the time...... 42 Bulbs (changing)...... 202 Control, emergency boot release...... 50 Advice on care and maintenance...... 230 Controls, at steering...... 260, 329, 349 Advice on driving...... 79, 224 Control stalk, lighting...... 117 Airbags...... 27, 152 Control stalk, wipers...... 127 Airbags, curtain...... 154, 155 Coolant level...... 238 Airbags, front...... 152, 155 Courtesy lamps...... 131 Airbags, lateral...... 154, 155 Cover, load space...... 77 Air conditioning...... 12 Cruise control...... 106, 108 Air conditioning, digital...... 67, 70 Cup holder...... 71 Air conditioning, manual...... 65, 70 Air filter...... 240 C Air intake...... 66, 69 Cable, audio...... 286, 333, 352 Air vents...... 62 Capacity, fuel tank...... 170 Alarm...... 43, 52 CarPlay connection...... 307 Anti-lock braking system (ABS)...... 140 CD...... 286, 332, 352 Anti-theft...... 46, 47 Central locking...... 43, 51 Armrest, front...... 72 Changing a bulb...... 202, 206 Assistance call...... 136, 255 Changing a fuse...... 208 D Assistance, emergency braking...... 140 Changing a wheel...... 194, 195 Audible warning...... 136 Changing a wiper blade...... 129, 220 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) - Audio streaming (Bluetooth)...... 286, 288, 335 Changing the remote control battery...... 46 Digital radio...... 284 Audio system (radio)...... 327, 347 Checking levels...... 237-239 Date (setting)...... 42 Automatic illumination Checking the engine oil level...... 31, 237 Daytime running lamps...... 118, 121 of headlamps...... 118 Checking tyre pressures Daytime running lamps, LED...... 121, 204 Auxiliary socket...... 73, 286, 333, 352 (using the kit)...... 186, 193 Deactivating the passenger airbag...... 153, 158 . 359 Alphabetical index
F Deadlocking...... 44 Filling the fuel tank...... 170, 172, 173 Grip control...... 143 Demisting/defrosting...... 70 Filter, particle...... 239, 240 Guide-me-home...... 45, 122, 123 Dials and gauges...... 14, 15 Fitting a wheel...... 199 Dimensions...... 252 Fitting roof bars...... 230 Dipstick...... 31, 237 Fittings, boot...... 75 Direction indicators...... 122, 135, 203, 206 Fittings, interior...... 71, 72 Display screen, instrument panel...... 14, 15 Flap, fuel filler...... 170, 172 Door pockets...... 71 Flashing indicators...... 122, 135, 203 Doors...... 48 Foglamp, rear...... 119, 206, 207 Driving abroad...... 124 Foglamps, front...... 119, 125, 205 Driving economically...... 12 Folding/unfolding the door mirrors...... 60 Dynamic stability control Frequency (radio)...... 282, 330, 350 H (DSC)...... 23, 140, 142, 143 Fuel...... 12, 173 Hazard warning lamps...... 78, 135 Fuel consumption...... 12, 40 Headlamps, automatic illumination...... 123 Fuel tank...... 170, 172 Headlamps...... 117, 203 Fusebox, dashboard...... 210, 212 Head restraints, front...... 57 Fusebox, engine compartment...... 213 Head restraints, rear...... 59 Fuses...... 208 Heating...... 64, 65, 67 Hill start assist...... 103 E EBA (Emergency braking assistance)...... 140 Eco-driving (advice)...... 12 Economy mode...... 219 Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)...... 140 G I Emergency call...... 136, 254 Gauge, fuel...... 14, 15, 170 Identification plates...... 253 Emergency warning lamps...... 78, 135 Gearbox, automatic...... 12, 91, 95, 214, 241 Emissions control system, SCR...... 25, 175 Ignition switch...... 80 Gearbox, Immobiliser, electronic...... 46, 47 Energy economy mode...... 219 electronic...... 12, 72, 84, 87, 100, 214, 241 Engine compartment...... 235, 236 Indicator, coolant temperature...... 33 Gearbox, manual...... 12, 83, 100, 241 Indicator, engine oil level...... 31, 237 Engine, Diesel...... 18, 173, 174, 236, 247, 249 Gear lever, automatic gearbox...... 91 Engine oil level indicator...... 237 Indicator lamps, operation...... 16, 20 Gear lever, electronic gearbox...... 84, 87, 241 Indicators, direction...... 135, 203, 206 Engine, petrol...... 173, 235, 243, 245 Gear lever, manual gearbox...... 83 Environment...... 12, 46, 70, 98, 181, 214, 239 Inflating tyres...... 12, 253 Gear shift indicator...... 99 Inflating tyres and accessories Glove box...... 71, 72 (using the kit)...... 186, 193 360 Alphabetical index
L Input, auxiliary...... 73, 286, 333, 352 Labels, identification...... 253 Mirrors, door...... 60 Instrument panels...... 14, 15 Level, brake fluid...... 237 Misfuel prevention...... 172 Instrument panel screen...... 14, 15, 38, 99 Level, Diesel additive...... 239 Mountings, Isofix...... 165 Internet browser...... 299 Level, engine coolant...... 33, 238 MP3 CD...... 332, 352 Isofix mountings...... 165 Level, engine oil...... 31, 237 Levels and checks...... 235-239 Light-emitting diodes - LEDs...... 206 Lighting control stalk...... 122 Lighting dimmer...... 130 Lighting, directional...... 125 Lighting, guide-me home...... 45, 122, 123 Lighting, interior...... 131 Lighting, mood...... 132 N J Loading...... 12, 230 Load reduction mode...... 219 Navigation...... 262 Jack...... 194 Locating your vehicle...... 45 Net, high load retaining...... 76 Jukebox...... 289 Locking...... 43 Net, storage...... 75 Jump starting...... 215 Locking the boot...... 50 Number plate lamps...... 207 Low fuel level...... 26, 170 Luggage retaining strap...... 75
K O Keeping children safe...... 151, 153, 156-160 Oil filter...... 240 Key with remote control...... 43 M Oil level...... 237 Kit, hands-free...... 314, 336 Opening the bonnet...... 234 Kit, temporary puncture repair...... 183, 188 Maintenance (advice)...... 230 Maintenance, routine...... 12, 235 Opening the boot...... 50 Map reading lamps...... 131 Opening the doors...... 48 Markings, identification...... 253 Opening the fuel filler flap...... 170 Mat...... 74 Opening the roof blind...... 133 Menu (touch screen)...... 261, 262, 264, 268, 276, 278, 280, 290, 292, 294, 310, 312 Mirror, rear view...... 61 . 361 Alphabetical index
P S Pads, brake...... 241 Rear foglamp...... 119, 206, 207 Safety, children...... 151, 153, 156-160 Paint colour code...... 253 Rear screen, demisting...... 70 Screen, instrument panel...... 14, 15, 38 Panoramic glass sunroof...... 133 Recharging the battery...... 216 Screen menu map...... 262, 264, 268, 276, Park Assist...... 113 Recirculation, air...... 66, 69 278, 280, 290, 292, Parking brake...... 82, 241 Reduction of electrical load...... 219 294, 310, 312, 341, 355 Parking lamps...... 122 Regeneration of the particle filter...... 240 Screenwash...... 126 Parking sensors, front...... 111 Reinitialisation of the under-inflation Screenwash fluid level...... 238 Parking sensors, rear...... 110 detection system...... 138 Screenwash, rear...... 127 Passenger compartment filter...... 240 Reinitialising the remote control...... 46 SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction)...... 175 Petrol...... 173 Reminder, key in ignition...... 81 Seat belts...... 149-151, 161 PEUGEOT Connect Assistance...... 255 Reminder, lighting on...... 120 Seats, front...... 56 PEUGEOT Connect Packs...... 255 Remote control...... 43-47 Seats, rear...... 58 PEUGEOT Connect SOS...... 254 Removing a wheel...... 197 Selector, gear...... 83, 84, 87, 91, 95 Player, Apple®...... 288, 335 Removing the mat...... 74 Serial number, vehicle...... 253 Player, MP3 CD...... 286, 332, 352 Replacing bulbs...... 202 Service indicator...... 28 Port, USB...... 71, 73, 286, 332 Replacing fuses...... 208 Servicing...... 12 Pre-heater, Diesel...... 18 Replacing the air filter...... 240 Settings...... 290, 339, 354 Pressures, tyres...... 253 Replacing the oil filter...... 240 Sidelamps...... 117, 121, 122, 204, 206 Pre-tensioning seat belts...... 151 Replacing the passenger Side repeater...... 205 Priming the fuel system...... 174 compartment filter...... 240 Snow chains...... 139, 201 Protecting children...... 151, 153, 156-160 Resetting the service indicator...... 30 Socket, 12 V accessory...... 71, 72 Puncture...... 183 Resetting the trip recorder...... 41 Sockets, audio...... 73, 286, 333, 352 Reversing camera...... 112 Speed limiter...... 104, 108 Reversing lamp...... 206, 207 Starting the engine...... 80 Risk areas (update)...... 273 Starting using another battery...... 215 Roof bars...... 230 Station, radio...... 282, 330, 350 Routine checks...... 240, 241 Stay, bonnet...... 234 Running out of fuel (Diesel)...... 174 Steering mounted controls, audio...... 260, 329, 349 Steering wheel, adjustment...... 59 Stop & Start...... 19, 40, 70, 100, 113, R 170, 214, 218, 234, 240 Radio...... 282, 330, 350 Storage...... 71, 72 Radio, digital (Digital Audio Stowing rings...... 75 Broadcasting - DAB)...... 284 Switching off the engine...... 80 Range, fuel...... 40 Synchronising the remote control...... 46 Range, AdBlue...... 176 RDS...... 283, 331, 350
362 Alphabetical index
T U Table of weights...... 245, 249 Under-inflation (detection)...... 137, 187 Wheel, spare...... 194, 195 Tables of engines...... 243, 247 Unlocking...... 43 Window controls...... 54 Tables of fuses...... 208 Unlocking the boot...... 50 Wiper blades (changing)...... 129, 220 Tank, fuel...... 170, 172 Updating risk areas...... 273 Wiper control stalk...... 126 Technical data...... 243-249 Updating the date...... 42 Wiper, rear...... 127 Telephone...... 310, 336 Updating the time...... 42 Wipers, automatic rain sensitive...... 19, 126, 128 Temperature, coolant...... 33 USB...... 73, 286, 332 Third brake lamp...... 207 Three flashes (direction indicators)...... 135 Time (setting)...... 42 TMC (Traffic info)...... 274 Tools...... 194, 208 Total distance recorder...... 41 Touch screen...... 34, 39, 139, 257 Touch screen (Menus)...... 261 Towbar...... 223, 224 V Towbar with quickly detachable towball...... 225 Vehicle identification...... 253 Towed loads...... 245, 249 Ventilation...... 62-64 Towing another vehicle...... 222 Voice recognition...... 303, 307 Towing eye...... 221 Traction control (ASR)...... 23, 140 Traffic information (TA)...... 275, 331 Traffic information (TMC)...... 274 Trailer...... 223, 224 Trajectory control systems...... 140 Triangle, warning...... 78 Trip computer...... 38-40 Trip distance recorder...... 41 W Tyre pressures...... 253 Tyres...... 12 Warning and indicator lamps...... 16-27 Tyre under-inflation detection...... 137, 187 Warning lamp, braking system...... 22 Warning lamp, Diesel engine pre-heater...... 18 Warning lamps...... 21 Warning lamp, SCR emissions control system...... 25 Washing (advice)...... 230 Weights...... 245, 249 . 363
Reproduction or translation of all or part of Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, by Labels are applied at various this document is prohibited without written application of the provisions of the European points on your vehicle. They carry authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT. legislation (Directive 2000/53) relating safety warnings as well as vehicle to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves identification information. Do not the objectives set by this legislation and remove them: they form an integral that recycled materials are used in the part of your vehicle. manufacture of the products that it sells.
Printed in the EU
Anglais 01-16 Anglais www.peugeot.com AN. 16288.0030 Monitoring
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Low fuel level fixed with the needle There remains approximately 5 litres Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of in the red zone. of fuel in the tank. fuel. At this point, you begin to use the fuel This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition reserve. is switched on, until a sufficient addition of fuel is made. flashing with the There remains very little fuel in the Fuel tank capacity: approximately 50 litres (45 litres needle in the red tank. for the BlueHDi Diesel engine). zone. Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, as this could damage the emission control and injection systems.
Engine oil fixed. There is a fault with the engine You must stop as soon it is safe to do so. pressure lubrication system. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Battery charge * fixed. The battery charging circuit has a The warning lamp should go off when the engine is fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or started. cut alternator belt, ...). If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Under-inflation fixed. The pressure in one or more wheels Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible. is too low. This check should preferably be carried out when the tyres are cold.
+ flashing then fixed, The tyre pressure monitoring system Under-inflation detection is not assured. accompanied by the has a fault or no sensor is detected Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a Service warning lamp. on one of the wheels. qualified workshop.
* Depending on the country of sale. 26
2008-add_en_Chap01_controle-de-marche_ed01-2016 Practical information Fuel tank Fuel tank capacity: approximately 50 litres (45 litres for the BlueHDi Diesel engine). Low fuel level Refuelling When the low fuel level is reached this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel. There remains approximately 5 litres of fuel in the tank. When the warning lamp flashes, there is very little fuel left . You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel. For more information on Running out of fuel (Diesel) , refer to the corresponding section.
1. Open the filler flap. To fill the tank safely: The key cannot be removed from the 2. Remove the filler cap. the engine must be switched off, lock until the cap is refitted. 3. Hook the filler cap. open the fuel filler flap 1 , Removing the filler cap may cause an insert the key in the cap 2 , then turn it to inrush of air. This vacuum is perfectly the left, normal and results from the sealing of the system. remove the cap and hook it onto the clip A self-adhesive label on the inner face of the located on the inside of the flap 3 , filler flap reminds you of the type of fuel to use fill the tank, but do not continue after the depending on your engine. 3rd cut-off of the pump ; this could cause Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres to malfunctions. be registered by the fuel gauge. With Stop & Start, never refuel with the system in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition with the key.
170
2008-add_en_Chap09_info-pratiques_ed01-2016 Practical information
Fuel supply cut-off When you have filled the tank: Your vehicle is fitted with a safety system that put the cap back in place, cuts off the supply of fuel in the event of an turn the key to the right, then remove it impact. from the cap, close the flap.
If you have put in the wrong fuel for the engine of your vehicle, you must have the fuel tank drained and filled with the correct fuel before starting the engine. 9
171
2008-add_en_Chap09_info-pratiques_ed01-2016 Monitoring
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations 1 Low fuel level fixed with the needle There remains approximately 5 litres Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel. in the red zone. of fuel in the tank. This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition At this point, you begin to use the fuel is switched on, until a sufficient addition of fuel is made. reserve. Fuel tank capacity: approximately 50 litres (45 litres for the BlueHDi Diesel engine). flashing with the There remains very little fuel in the Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, as needle in the red tank. this could damage the emission control and injection zone. systems.
Engine oil fixed. There is a fault with the engine You must stop as soon it is safe to do so. pressure lubrication system. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Battery charge * fixed. The battery charging circuit has a The warning lamp should go off when the engine is fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or started. cut alternator belt, etc.). If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Under-inflation fixed. The pressure in one or more wheels Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible. is too low. This check should preferably be carried out when the tyres are cold.
+ flashing then fixed, The tyre pressure monitoring system Under-inflation detection is not assured. accompanied by the has a fault or no sensor is detected Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a Service warning lamp. on one of the wheels. qualified workshop.
* Depending on the country of sale. 1
2008-additif_en_Chap01_controle-de-marche_ed01-2016 Monitoring Touch screen It gives access to: General operation - menus for adjusting settings for vehicle functions and systems, Recommendations Principles - audio and display configuration menus, It is necessary to press firmly, particularly for Press the " MENU " button for access to the - audio system and telephone controls and "flick" gestures (scrolling through lists, moving different menus, then press the virtual buttons the display of associated information. the map, etc.). on the touch screen. A light wipe is not enough. Each menu is displayed over one or two pages The screen does not recognise pressing with (primary page and secondary page). more than one finger. And, depending on equipment, it allows: This technology allows use at all temperatures Use this button to go to the - the display of alert messages and the and when wearing gloves. secondary page. visual parking sensors information, Do not use pointed objects on the touch - access to the controls for the navigation screen. system and Internet services, and the Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands. Use this button to return to the display of associated information. Uses a soft clean cloth to clean the touch primary page. screen. After a few moments with no action on the secondary page, the primary page is displayed automatically. For safety reasons , the driver must State of indicator lamps only carry out operations that Some buttons contain an indicator lamp that Use this button for access to require close attention with the gives the state of the corresponding function. additional information and to the vehicle stationary. Green indicator: you have switched on the settings for certain functions. Some functions are not accessible corresponding function. when driving. Orange indicator: you have switched off the Use this button to confirm. corresponding function.
Use this button to quit.
2 Monitoring 1
1. Volume / mute. See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section. Menus Press this button for access to the different menus.
Navigation Radio Media Settings Depending on trim level, navigation See the "Audio equipment and Allows configuration of the display may be unavailable, an option or telematics" section. and the system. standard. Gives access to interactive help See the "Audio equipment and for the vehicle's main systems and telematics" section. warning / indicator lamps.
Connected services Telephone Driving Run some of your smartphone's See the "Audio equipment and Allows access to the trip computer and, applications via MirrorLinkTM or CarPlay®. telematics" section. depending on version, the adjustment See the "Audio equipment and telematics" of settings for certain functions. section. See the corresponding section.
3
2008-additif_en_Chap01_controle-de-marche_ed01-2016 Practical information Fuel tank Fuel tank capacity: approximately 50 litres (45 litres for the BlueHDi Diesel engine). Low fuel level Refuelling When the low fuel level is reached, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel. There remains approximately 5 litres of fuel in the tank. When the warning lamp flashes, there is very little fuel left . You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel. For more information on Running out of fuel (Diesel) , refer to the corresponding section.
1. Open the filler flap. To fill the tank safely: The key cannot be removed from the 2. Remove the filler cap. the engine must be switched off, lock until the cap is refitted. 3. Hook the filler cap. open the fuel filler flap 1 , Removing the filler cap may cause an insert the key in the cap 2 , then turn it to inrush of air. This vacuum is perfectly the left, normal and results from the sealing of the system. A self-adhesive label on the inner face of the remove the cap and hook it onto the clip filler flap reminds you of the type of fuel to use located on the inside of the flap 3 , depending on your engine. fill the tank, but do not continue after the Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres to 3 rd cut-off of the nozzle ; this could cause With Stop & Start, never refuel with the be registered by the fuel gauge. malfunctions. system in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition with the key.
4
2008-additif_en_Chap09_info-pratiques_ed01-2016 Practical information
Fuel supply cut-off When you have filled the tank: Your vehicle is fitted with a safety system that put the cap back in place, cuts off the supply of fuel in the event of an turn the key to the right, then remove it impact. from the cap, close the flap.
If you have put in the wrong fuel for the engine of your vehicle, you must have the fuel tank drained and filled with the correct fuel before starting the engine. 9
5
2008-additif_en_Chap09_info-pratiques_ed01-2016 Practical information Compatibility of fuels Fuel used for petrol engines Diesel fuel that meets standard EN16734 The only Diesel additives authorised for mixed with a biofuel that meets standard use are those that meet the B715000 The petrol engines are compatible with biofuels EN14214 (possibly containing up to 10% standard. that conform to current and future European Fatty Acid Methyl Ester). standards and which can be obtained from Diesel fuel at low temperature filling stations. In temperatures below 0°C (+32°F), the formation of paraffins in the summer Diesel Paraffinic Diesel fuel that meets Petrol that meets the EN228 standard, fuels may result in abnormal operation of the standard EN15940 mixed with a biofuel mixed with a biofuel meeting the fuel supply system. To avoid this, the use of that meets standard EN14214 (possibly EN15376 standard. winter Diesel fuels is recommended, keeping containing up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl the tank topped up to more than 50% of its Ester). capacity. The only petrol additives authorised for The use of B20 or B30 fuel meeting If in spite of this you experience difficulties use are those that meet the B715001 standard EN16709 is possible in your starting the engine in temperatures below -15°C standard. Diesel engine. However, this use, even (+5°F), simply leave the vehicle in a garage or a occasional, requires strict application heated workshop for a while. of the special servicing conditions Fuel used for Diesel referred to as "Arduous conditions". engines Travelling abroad The Diesel engines are compatible with Certain fuels could damage the biofuels that conform to current and future For more information, contact a PEUGEOT engine of your vehicle. In certain European standards and which can be dealer or a qualified workshop. countries, the use of a particular fuel obtained from filling stations. may be required (specific octane Diesel fuel that meets standard EN590 The use of any other type of (bio) rating, specific sales name, etc.) mixed with a biofuel that meets standard fuel (vegetable or animal oils, pure or to ensure correct operation of the EN14214 (possibly containing up to 7% diluted, domestic fuel, etc.) is strictly engine. Fatty Acid Methyl Ester). prohibited (risk of damage to the engine For any additional information, contact and fuel system). your dealer.
6
2008-additif_en_Chap09_info-pratiques_ed01-2016 Technical data Identifi cation markings Various visible markings for the identification of your vehicle.
It bears the following information: - the tyre inflation pressures with and without load, - the tyre sizes, - the inflation pressure of the spare wheel, - the paint colour code.
The original tyres fitted to the vehicle may have a load index or speed rating higher than those given on the label; this has no effect on the inflation pressures.
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) C. Manufacturer's label. The tyre pressures must be checked under the bonnet. This number is indicated on a self- when the tyres are cold, at least once This number is engraved on the bodywork destroying label affixed to the centre pillar, a month. near the damper support. on the left-hand or right-hand side.
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) at D. Tyre/paint label. the bottom of the windscreen aperture. This self-adhesive label is affixed to the Low tyre pressures increase fuel This number is indicated on a self- centre pillar, on the driver's side. c o n s u m p t i o n . 11 adhesive label which is visible through the windscreen.
7
2008-additif_en_Chap11_caracteristiques-techniques_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Emergency or assistance call Type 1 PEUGEOT Connect SOS In an emergency, press this If an impact is detected by the airbag button for more than 2 seconds. control unit, and independently of Flashing of the green indicator the deployment of any airbags, an lamp and a voice message emergency call is made automatically. confirm that the call has been made to the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" * centre.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels If you benefit from the PEUGEOT the request. Connect Packs offer with the SOS and The green indicator lamp goes off. assistance pack included, there are additional services available to you in The green indicator lamp remains on (without your personal space, via your country's flashing) when communication is established. website. It goes off at the end of the call.
"PEUGEOT Connect SOS" immediately locates * Depending on the general terms and your vehicle, makes contact with you in your conditions of use for the service, available language ** and - if necessary - organises from dealers, and technological and technical sending of the appropriate emergency limits. services ** . In countries where the service is not operational, or if the locating service has been ** Depending on the geographic cover for expressly declined, the call is directed straight "PEUGEOT Connect SOS", "PEUGEOT to the emergency services (112) without Connect Assistance" and the official national location. language selected by the owner of the vehicle. The list of countries covered and the PEUGEOT CONNECT services is available from dealers or on your country's website. 8
2008-additif_en_Chap12a_BTA-2-BTA-3R_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
PEUGEOT Connect Assistance Press this button for more than Operation of the system If you purchased your vehicle outside 2 seconds to request assistance the Brand's dealer network, we suggest When the ignition is switched on, if the vehicle breaks down. that you have a dealer check and, if the green indicator lamp comes A voice message confirms that desired, modify the configuration of on for 3 seconds indicating that the call has been made ** . the system is operating correctly. these services. In a multi-lingual country, configuration If the orange indicator lamp Pressing this button again immediately cancels is possible in the official national flashes then goes off: the system the request. language of your choice. has a fault. The cancellation is confirmed by a voice If the orange indicator lamp is on fixed: replace message. the back-up battery. For technical reasons, in particular In both cases, the emergency and assistance to improve the quality of PEUGEOT calls service may not work. Geo-location CONNECT services to customers, Contact a qualified repairer as soon as the manufacturer reserves the right to possible. carry out updates to the vehicle's on- board telematic system at any time.
The fault with the system does not You can deactivate geo-location by prevent the vehicle being driven. simultaneously pressing the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" and "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" buttons, followed by a press on ** Depending on the geographic cover for "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" to confirm. "PEUGEOT Connect SOS", "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" and the official national To reactivate geo-location, simultaneously language selected by the owner of the press the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" and vehicle. "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" buttons The list of countries covered and the again, followed by a press on "PEUGEOT PEUGEOT CONNECT services is available Connect Assistance" to confirm. from dealers or on your country's website. . 9
2008-additif_en_Chap12a_BTA-2-BTA-3R_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Emergency or assistance call Type 2 PEUGEOT Connect SOS In an emergency, press this If an impact is detected by the airbag button for more than 2 seconds. control unit, and independently of Flashing of the green indicator the deployment of any airbags, an lamp and a voice message emergency call is made automatically. confirm that the call has been made to the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" call centre * .
Pressing this button again immediately cancels If you benefit from the PEUGEOT the request. Connect Packs offer with the SOS and The green indicator lamp goes off. assistance pack included, there are additional services available to you in The green indicator lamp remains on (without your personal space, via your country's flashing) when communication is established. website. It goes off at the end of the call.
"PEUGEOT Connect SOS" immediately locates * Depending on the general terms and your vehicle, makes contact with you in your conditions of use for the service, available language ** and - if necessary - organises from dealers and subject to technological and sending of the appropriate emergency technical limitations. services ** . In countries where the service is not operational, or if the locating service has been ** Depending on the geographic cover of expressly declined, the call is directed straight "PEUGEOT Connect SOS", "PEUGEOT to the emergency services (112) without Connect Assistance" and the official national location. language selected by the owner of the vehicle. The list of countries covered and the PEUGEOT CONNECT services is available from dealers or on your country's website. 10
2008-additif_en_Chap12a_BTA-2-BTA-3R_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
PEUGEOT Connect Assistance Press this button for more than Operation of the system If you purchased your vehicle outside When the ignition is switched on, 2 seconds to request assistance the Brand's dealer network, we suggest the green indicator lamp comes if the vehicle breaks down. that you have a dealer check and, on for 3 seconds indicating that A voice message confirms that if desired, modify the configuration the system is operating correctly. the call has been made ** . of these services. In a multi-lingual For all countries except Russia, Belarus country, configuration is possible in and Kazakhstan. Pressing this button again immediately cancels the official national language of your If the red indicator lamp flashes the request. choice. then goes off: the system has a The cancellation is confirmed by a voice fault. message. If the red indicator lamp is on fixed: replace the For technical reasons, in particular back-up battery. Geo-location to improve the quality of PEUGEOT For Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan. CONNECT services to customers, If the red indicator lamp is on the manufacturer reserves the right to fixed: the system has a fault. carry out updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic system at any time.
If the red indicator lamp flashes: replace the You can deactivate geo-location by back-up battery. simultaneously pressing the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" and "PEUGEOT Connect In both cases, the emergency and assistance ** Depending on the geographic cover of Assistance" buttons, followed by a press on calls may not work. "PEUGEOT Connect SOS", "PEUGEOT "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" to confirm. Contact a qualified repairer as soon as Connect Assistance" and the official national possible. To reactivate geo-location, simultaneously language selected by the owner of the press the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" and vehicle. "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" buttons The list of countries covered and the The fault with the system does not again, followed by a press on "PEUGEOT PEUGEOT CONNECT services is available prevent the vehicle being driven. Connect Assistance" to confirm. from dealers or on your country's website. . 11
2008-additif_en_Chap12a_BTA-2-BTA-3R_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics 7-inch touch screen GPS satellite navigation - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth® telephone
Contents First steps 14 Steering mounted controls 16 Menus 17 Navigation 18 Navigation - Guidance 26 Traffic 30 Radio Media 32 Radio 38 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 40 Media 42 Settings 46 Connected services 54 MirrorLinkTM 54 CarPlay® 58 Telephone 60 Frequently asked questions 68
The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in As a safety measure, the driver should only carry out operations your vehicle. which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary. The display of an energy economy mode message signals that electrical systems operating are going into standby. Refer to the energy economy mode section. . 13
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics First steps Use the buttons to the left of the touch screen In very hot conditions, the system may for access to the menu carousels, then press go into stand-by (screen and sound the virtual buttons in the touch screen. completely off) for a minimum period of Each menu is displayed in one or two pages 5 minutes. (primary page and secondary page).
Primary page Secondary page
14
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Short-cuts: using the touch buttons in the upper band of the touch screen, it is possible In very hot conditions, the volume may to go directly to the selection of audio source, be limited to protect the system. The the list of stations (or titles, depending on the return to normal takes place when source). the temperature in the passenger compartment drops.
The screen is of the "resistive" type, it is necessary to press firmly, particularly for "flick" gestures (scrolling through Press on Menu to display the menu a list, moving the map, etc.). A simple carrousel. wipe will not be enough. Pressing with more than one finger is not recognised. The screen can be used when wearing Selection of audio source (depending on Press on SRC to display the audio gloves. This technology allows use at version): sources carrousel. all temperatures. - FM / DAB* / AM stations*. - USB memory stick. - CD player (located in the glove box)*. Volume adjustment (each source is independent, - Smartphone via MirrorLinkTM or CarPlay®. including traffic announcements (TA) and - Telephone connected by Bluetooth* and navigation instructions). To clean the screen, use a soft non- with Bluetooth* audio streaming. abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) - Media player connected to the auxiliary without any additional product. socket (jack, cable not supplied). With the engine running, press to Do not use pointed objects on the mute the sound. screen. With the ignition off, press to switch Do not touch the screen with wet the system on. hands.
* Depending on equipment. . 15
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics Steering mounted controls
Press: mute on / off. Radio, rotate: automatic search for Telephone: start or answer a call. the previous / next station. Call in progress: telephone menu Radio, press: preset stations. (end call, secret mode, hands-free Media, rotate: previous / next track. mode). Increase volume. Press: confirm a selection. Telephone, press and hold: reject an incoming call, end a call in progress; other than call in progress, telephone Decrease volume. menu. Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks. Change audio source: radio, media. Radio, press and hold: update the list of stations received.
16
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics Menus Navigation Radio Media Settings (Depending on equipment)
Enter navigation settings and choose a Select an audio source, a radio station, display Adjust the settings for sound (balance, destination. photographs. ambience, etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time, etc.).
Connected services Telephone Driving (Depending on equipment)
Operate certain applications on your Connect a telephone by Bluetooth®. Access to the trip computer. smartphone via MirrorLinkTM or CarPlay®. Access to the CarPlay® function after Activate, deactivate or enter settings for certain connection of your smartphone by USB cable. vehicle functions. . 17
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics Navigation
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Navigation Route settings
18
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Enter destination Display recent destinations Fastest Shortest Time/distance Ecological Choose the navigation criteria. The map displays the route chosen according to Tolls these criteria. Route settings Ferries Navigation Traffic Settings Strict-Close Navigation Show route on map Display the map and start navigation. Confirm Save the options.
Save current location Save the current address.
Stop navigation Delete the navigation information. Choose the volume for voice and announcement Voice synthesis of street names. Detour from your initial route by a determined Diversion distance. Display in text mode
Zoom in.
Zoom out. Navigation Display in full screen mode. Use the arrows to move the map. Switch to 2D map. . 19
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Enter destination Address
For managing contacts and their addresses, refer to the Navigation "Telephone" section.
Contacts
To use the telephone functions, refer to the "Telephone" section.
20
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Current loc.
Point of interest Address settings
Town center Address Save Save the current address.
Add waypoint Add a waypoint to the route.
Navigate to Press to calculate the route.
Addresses Navigation View Secondary page Contacts Navigate to Select a contact then calculate the route. Enter destination Search for contact
Call
On the map Display the map and zoom to view the roads.
Create, add or delete a waypoint or view the Waypoint & route route.
Stop Delete navigation information.
Navigate to Press to calculate the route. . 21
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Navigation Search for a point of interest
Point of interest displayed on the map
22
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments All POIs
Navigation Motor List of categories available. After choosing the category, select the points of Secondary page Dining/hotels interest.
Search for POI Personal Search Save the settings.
Select all Navigation Delete Choose the display settings for POIs. Secondary page Import POIs Show POIs Confirm Save the options.
. 23
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Diversion
Traffic messages
Map settings
Map settings Navigation
Settings
Settings Moving between Settings the two menus.
24
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments On the route
Around vehicle Navigation Settings for the choice of messages and the Near destination filter radius. Secondary page Detour over a distance Traffic messages Detour Recalculate route
Finish Save your selections.
Flat view north direction
Orientation Flat view vehicle direction
Perspective view Navigation Choose the display and orientation of the Maps map. Secondary page "Day" map colour Map settings Aspect "Night" map colour
Automatic day/night
Confirm Save the settings.
Route settings Navigation Voice Enter settings and choose the volume for the voice and announcement of street names. Secondary page Alarm!
Settings Traffic options Confirm Save your selections. . 25
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics Navigation - Guidance Choosing a new destination Towards a new destination
Press on Navigation to display the Select "Save" to save the address To delete navigation information, primary page. entered as a contact entry. press on "Settings". The system allows up to 200 entries.
Press on the secondary page. Press on "Stop navigation".
Select "Navigate to". Select "Enter destination". To resume navigation press on "Settings". Choose the navigation criteria: Select "Address". "Fastest" or "Shortest" or "Time/ Press on "Resume guidance". distance" or "Ecological".
Select the "Country:" from the Choose the restriction criteria: list offered, then in the same "Tolls", "Ferries", "Traffic", "Strict", way the "City:" or its post "Close". code, the "Road:", the "N°:". Confirm each time. Select "Confirm".
Or Press on "Show route on map" to start navigation.
26
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Towards a recent destination Towards a contact
Press on Navigation to display the Select a destination from To be able to use navigation "towards primary page. the contacts in the list a contact in the directory", it is first offered. necessary to enter the address for your Press on the secondary page. contact. Select "Navigate to". Press on Navigation to display the primary page. Select "Enter destination". Select the criteria then "Confirm" to Press on the secondary page. start navigation.
Select an address from the list offered. Select "Enter destination".
Select "Navigate to". Select "Contacts".
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or press "Show route on map" to start navigation. . 27
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Towards GPS coordinates Towards a point on the map Towards points of interest (POI)
Press on Navigation to display the Press on Navigation to display the Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different primary page. primary page. categories.
Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary page. Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Select "Enter destination". Select "Enter destination". Press on the secondary page.
Select "Address". Select "On the map". Select "Search for POI".
Enter the "Longitude:" Zooming in on the map shows points with Select "All POIs", then the "Latitude:". information.
A long press on a point opens its content. Or Select "Navigate to". "Motor",
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or press "Show route on map" to start Or navigation. "Dining/hotels".
28
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
An annual mapping update allows new points of interest to be presented to you. You can also update the Risk areas / Danger zones every month. The detailed procedure is available on: http://peugeot.navigation.com.
. 29
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics Traffic Risk areas / Danger zone Traffic information alert settings Display of messages
Press on Navigation to display the Press on Navigation to display the primary page. This series of alerts and displays is primary page. only available if Risk areas have first been downloaded and installed on the Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary page. system.
Select "Traffic messages". Select "Settings".
Choose filter settings for: Select "Alarm!" (Alert). "On the route",
It is then possible to activate Risk areas alerts then: "Around", - "Audible warning" - "Alert only when navigating" - "Alert only for overspeed" "Near destination", filters to - "Display speed limits" fine-tune the list of messages. - Timing: the choice of timing allows the time before giving a Risk areas alert to be Press again to remove the filter. defined.
Select "Confirm".
30
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Setting filters Receiving TA messages
Select the message from Press on Navigation to display the Press on Navigation to display the the list offered. primary page. primary page.
Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary page. Select the magnifying glass to have voice information. Select "Settings". Select "Settings".
TMC (Traffic Message Channel) Select "Traffic options". Select "Voice". messages on GPS-Navigation contain traffic information transmitted in real time. Select: Activate / Deactivate "Traffic - "Be advised of new messages", (TA)". - "Speak messages". Then enter the filter radius. The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function Select "Confirm". needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report is transmitted, the current audio source is interrupted We recommend a filter radius of: automatically to play the TA message. - 12 miles (20 km) in urban areas, Normal playback of the audio source - 30 miles (50 km) on motorways. resumes at the end of the transmission of the message. . 31
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics Radio Media
Level 1 Level 2
List of FM stations
Save
32
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Radio Media List of FM stations Press on a radio station to select it. List
FM Radio
DAB Radio
AM Radio
USB
Radio Media CD Select the change of source. TM Source MirrorLink
CarPlay®
iPod
Bluetooth
AUX
Radio Media Press on an empty location then on Save. Save . 33
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
List of FM stations
Media Photos
34
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Save Press a radio station to select it. Radio Media Update list Update the list of stations received. Secondary page Frequency Enter the desired radio frequency. Radio list Confirm Save the settings.
Home screen Display the selected photo in the home page.
Rotate Rotate the photo 90°.
Radio Media Select all the photos in the list. Select all Press again to deselect. Secondary page Previous photo. Display the photos in sequence, full-screen. Photos Slideshow Pause / Play. The system supports the following image formats: .gif, .jpg, .bmp, .png. Next photo.
Full screen Display the selected photo full-screen.
. 35
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Media
Settings
Settings
Settings
36
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Radio Media
Secondary page Presentation of the last media used.
Media list
Shuffle (all tracks)
Media Shuffle (current album) Choose the play settings. Settings Repeat
Aux. amplification
RDS options Radio Media Radio DAB/FM station tracking Activate or deactivate the settings. Secondary page Display Radio Text Settings Digital radio slideshow Settings display
Traffic announcements (TA)
Announcements News - Weather Activate or deactivate the settings. Sport - Programmes info Settings Flash - Unforeseen events Confirm Save the settings. . 37
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics Radio Selecting a station Changing a radio frequency Press on Radio Media to display the Select "Save". Press on Radio Media to display the primary page. primary page.
Select "List" in the primary page. Select a preset radio station in the list. If necessary, select the change of By automatic frequency search Or source. Press on Radio Media to display the primary page. Select "FM Radio". Press 3 or 4 to move the cursor for an Press on the secondary page. automatic search down or up for a radio Or frequency. "AM Radio". Select "Radio list" in the secondary THEN page.
Radio reception may be affected by Select the change of source. Select a radio station from the use of electrical equipment not the list offered. approved by PEUGEOT, such as a USB charger connected to the 12 V socket. Select "FM Radio". The exterior environment (hills, Select "Update list" to refresh the buildings, tunnel, car park, below list. ground, etc.) may prevent reception, Or even in RDS station tracking mode. To select a preset radio station. This phenomenon is normal in the "AM Radio". propagation of radio waves and is in no Press on Radio Media to display the way indicative of a fault with the audio primary page. system.
38
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Presetting a station Activating / Deactivating RDS OR Select a radio station or frequency (refer to the Press on Radio Media to display the corresponding section). primary page. Press on to display the Radio Media Press on "Save" (preset). primary page. Press on the secondary page.
Press on the secondary page. Select "Settings".
Select a number in the list to preset the Press on Frequency. previously chosen radio station. A long press on a number saves (presets) Select "Radio". the station.
THEN Or Activate/deactivate "RDS options". Enter the frequency in full (e.g. A press on this button presets all of 92.10 MHz) using the keypad then the stations one after the other. RDS, if activated, allows you to continue "Confirm". listening to the same station by automatic Recalling preset stations retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage Press on Radio Media to display the of an RDS station may not be assured primary page. Changing radio station throughout the entire country as Pressing the name of the current radio station radio stations do not cover 100% of Select "Save" (preset). brings up a list. the territory. This explains the loss of To change radio station press the name of the reception of the station during a journey. desired station. . 39
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio
Short-cut: access to the choice of audio Display of the name of the source and the list of stations (or titles, current station. depending on the source). Select the radio station.
Any thumbnail broadcast by Select the audio source. the station. Display the "DAB" band.
Display of "Radiotext" for Secondary page. the current station.
Next "Multiplex". Next radio station. Previous "Multiplex". Previous radio station. Preset stations, buttons 1 to 15. Short press: select the Display the name and preset radio station. number of the "multiplex" Long press: preset a radio service being used. station.
Display of options: If the "DAB" radio station being listened to is not if active but not available, the display will be greyed out, available on "FM", the "DAB FM" option is greyed out. if active and available, the display will be in white.
Journaline® is a text-based information service designed for digital radio systems. It provides text-based information structured around topics and sub-topics. This service is available from the "LIST OF DAB STATIONS" page.
40
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Digital radio DAB / FM auto tracking
Digital radio provides higher quality "DAB" does not cover 100% of the If "DAB/FM station tracking" is reception and also the graphical display territory. activated, there is a difference of a few of current information on the radio When the digital radio signal is poor, seconds when the system switches to station being listened to. Select "List" in "DAB/FM station tracking" allows you to "FM" analogue radio with sometimes a the primary page. continue listening to the same station, variation in volume. The range of multiplexes available is by automatically switching to the When the digital signal is restored, displayed in alphabetical order. corresponding "FM" analogue station the system automatically changes (if there is one). back to "DAB".
Press on Radio Media to display the Press on Radio Media to display the If the "DAB" station being listened to primary page. primary page. is not available on "FM" ("DAB/FM" option greyed out), or "DAB/FM station Select change of source. Press on the secondary page. tracking" is not activated, the sound will cut out while the digital signal is too weak. Select "DAB Radio". Select "Settings".
Select "List" in the primary page. Select "Radio".
or Select "Radio list" in the secondary Select "Digital/FM auto page. tracking" then "Confirm". Select the radio station from the list offered. . 41
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics Media USB port Auxiliary socket (AUX) Selecting the source Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Select the change of source.
Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port This source is only available if the "Auxiliary or connect the USB device to the USB port socket" option has been activated in the using a suitable cable (not supplied). "Media" settings. Connect the portable device (MP3 player, etc.) To protect the system, do not use a to the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio USB hub. cable (not supplied). Choose the source. The system builds playlists (in temporary First adjust the volume of your portable device memory), an operation which can take from (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your The steering mounted SRC (source) a few seconds to several minutes at the first audio system. button can be used to go to the next connection. Display and management of the controls are media source, available if the source Reduce the number of non-music files and the via the portable device. is active. number of folders to reduce the waiting time. The playlists are updated every time the Press on OK to confirm the selection. ignition is switched off or on connection of a USB memory stick. The lists are memorised: if they are not modified, the subsequent loading CD player time will be shorter. Insert the CD in the player.
42
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Information and advice The audio system will only play audio files In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or Use only USB memory sticks formatted to with" .wma, .aac, .flac, .ogg and .mp3" file CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select FAT32 (file allocation table). extensions and with a bit rate of between the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard. 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. If the disc is recorded in another format it may It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. not be played correctly. To protect the system, do not use a No other type of file (.mp4, etc.) can be played. It is recommended that the same recording USB hub. ".wma" files must be of the standard wma 9 type. standard is always used for an individual disc, The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) 48 KHz. for optimum sound quality. It is recommended that the USB cable In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the for the portable device is used. Joliet standard is recommended.
It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using of special The system supports USB mass characters (e.g. " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing storage devices, BlackBerry® devices and displaying problems. or Apple® players via USB ports. The adaptor cable is not supplied. Control of the peripheral device is with the audio system controls. Other peripherals, not recognised on connection, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not supplied). . 43
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016
Audio and Telematics
Bluetooth® audio streaming Connecting Apple® players Streaming allows audio files on your telephone The classifications available are those to be played through the vehicle's speakers. of the portable device connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks / podcasts). Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone" The default classification used is by section, then "Bluetooth". artist. To modify the classification used, Choose the "Audio" or "All" profile. return to the first level of the menu If play does not start automatically, it may be then select the desired classification necessary to start the audio playback from the (playlists for example) and confirm ® telephone. Connect the Apple player to the USB port to go down through the menu to the Control is from the peripheral device or by using a suitable cable (not supplied). desired track. using the audio system buttons. Play starts automatically. The version of software in the audio system Control is via the audio system. may not be compatible with the generation of your Apple® player. Once connected in streaming mode, the telephone is considered to be a media source. It is recommended that you activate "Repeat" on the Bluetooth® peripheral.
. 45
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics Settings
Level 1 Level 2
Audio settings
Audio settings
Audio settings
46
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Ambience Choose the sound ambience.
Balance Sound distribution using the Arkamys® system.
Set the volume or activate the link to vehicle Sound effects Settings speed.
Audio settings Ringtones Set the telephone ringtone and volume.
Set the volume and voice for speaking street Voice names.
Confirm Save your settings.
Settings Function that turns off the display. Pressing the screen reactivates it. Turn off screen
. 47
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2
Units
Factory settings
Configuration Adjust date and time
Display screen
48
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Comments Set the units used to display distance, fuel Units consumption and temperature.
Settings Select the desired data in the list then press Delete data Delete. Secondary page Factory settings Return to factory settings. System Settings
Confirm Save the settings.
Settings
Secondary page Confirm Set the date and time then confirm.
Time/Date
Activate automatic text scrolling Settings
Secondary page Activate animations Activate or deactivate the setting then confirm.
Screen settings Confirm
. 49
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2
Choice of language
Configuration Calculator
Calendar
50
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Settings
Secondary page Confirm Select the language then confirm.
Languages
Settings
Secondary page Select the calculator.
Calculator
Settings
Secondary page Select the calendar.
Calendar
. 51
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Audio settings Press on Settings to display the The distribution (or spatialisation using On-board audio: Arkamys© Sound primary page. the Arkamys® system) of sound is an Staging optimises sound distribution in audio process that allows the audio the passenger compartment. Select "Audio settings". quality to be adapted to the number of passengers in the vehicle. Available only with the 6-speaker Select "Ambience" configuration.
The audio settings (Ambience, Bass:, Or Treble: and Loudness) are different "Balance" and independent for each sound source. The settings for Distribution and Or Balance are common to all sources. "Sound effects"
- "Ambience" (choice of 6 musical Or ambiences) "Ringtones" - "Bass:" - "Treble:" - "Loudness" (Activate/Deactivate) - "Distribution" ("Driver", "All Or passengers", "Front only") "Voice". - "Audible response from touch screen" - "Volume linked to speed" (Activate/Deactivate)
52
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Modifying system settings
Press on Settings to display the Press on Settings to display the Press on Settings to display the primary page. primary page. primary page.
Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary page
Select "System Settings". Select "Screen settings". Select "Time/Date" to change the time zone, synchronisation with GPS, the time and its format, then the date.
Select "Units" to change the units Activate or deactivate "Activate of distance, fuel consumption and automatic text scrolling" and The system does not manage changes temperature. "Activate animations". between summer time and winter time Select "Delete data" to delete the automatically (depending on country). list of recent destinations, personal points of interest, contacts in the directory. Select "Languages" to change language. Choose the item then select "Delete".
Select "Calculator" to display a calculator. Select "Factory settings" to return to the original settings. Select "Calendar" to display a calendar. . 53
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics Connected services MirrorLinkTM
Optional depending on the smartphone and operating system.
54
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
TM Start the application on the MirrorLink smartphone As a safety measure, applications smartphone (optional, depending can only be viewed with the vehicle connection on the smartphone and operating stationary; display is interrupted once system). As a safety measure and because it the vehicle is moving. requires sustained attention by the During the procedure, several screen driver, using a smartphone when pages relating to certain functions driving is prohibited. Please note: are displayed. All operations must be done with the - if your smartphone is supported, to Accept to start and complete the vehicle stationary. make it "MirrorLinkTM" compatible, connection. some phone manufacturers Once connection is established, a page nevertheless invite you to first is displayed with the applications already The synchronisation of a download a dedicated application. downloaded to your smartphone and adapted smartphone allows applications on a to MirrorLinkTM technology. smartphone that are adapted to the If only one application has been downloaded to MirrorLinkTM technology to be displayed the smartphone, it starts automatically. in the vehicle's screen. When connecting a smartphone to The principles and standards the system, it is recommended that Access to the different audio sources remains ® are constantly evolving. For the Bluetooth be started on the smartphone accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM communication process between the display, using touch buttons in the upper bar. smartphone and the system to work Connect a USB cable. The Access to the menus for the system is possible correctly, the smartphone must be smartphone charges when at any time using the dedicated buttons unlocked; update the operating system connected by a USB cable. of your smartphone as well as the date and time in the smartphone and the From the system, press on Voice recognition "Connected services" to display the system. Press the end of the lighting control stalk to primary page. For the list of eligible smartphones, start voice recognition of your smartphone via connect to the brand's internet website the system. Press on "MirrorLinkTM" to in your country. Voice recognition requires a compatible start the application in the smartphone connected to the vehicle by system. Bluetooth®. . 55
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
56
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Access or return to the applications already downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to MirrorLinkTM technology.
Access to a menu list depending on the Connected application chosen. services "Back": abandon the current operation, go up one level. MirrorLinkTM "Home": access or return to the "Car mode" page.
Access to the "Connected services" primary page.
. 57
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics CarPlay®
58
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
CarPlay® smartphone connection Connect a USB cable. The When the telephone menu is displayed, As a safety measure and because it smartphone charges when connection of the USB cable causes the requires sustained attention by the connected by a USB cable. display to automatically change to CarPlay driver, using a smartphone when mode. driving is prohibited. On connecting the USB cable, the When another menu is displayed, on All operations must be done with the "Telephone" function changes to connection of a USB cable a message is vehicle stationary. "CarPlay" in the menu carousel. displayed in the upper bar, indicating that Press on "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay mode has been activated. CarPlay® interface. Press Open to display CarPlay mode. The synchronisation of a smartphone allows applications on a Or smartphone that are adapted to the Voice recognition CarPlay® technology to be displayed on Connect the USB cable. The Press the end of the lighting control stalk to the vehicle's screen. smartphone is charged while start voice recognition of your smartphone via As the principles and standards are connected by the USB cable. the system. constantly evolving, it is recommended that you update the operating system of From the system, press on your smartphone. "Connected services" to display the For the list of eligible smartphones, primary page. connect to the brand's internet website in your country. Press on "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® interface.
As a safety measure, applications During the procedure, one or more can only be viewed with the vehicle screen pages relating to certain stationary; display is interrupted once functions are displayed on connection. the vehicle is moving. . 59
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics Telephone
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Call log
Contacts
60
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments All calls
Incoming calls
Outgoing calls Telephone Contacts After making choices, start the call. Call log View Magnifying glass Create
Call
Addresses
Create
Modify
Delete View Telephone Delete all After making choices, start the call. Contacts By name
Confirm
Navigate to
Search for contact
Call . 61
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Bluetooth (devices)
Telephone connection Devices detected
Telephone Options
62
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments Start the search for another peripheral device to Search connect. Telephone Start or stop the Bluetooth® connection to the connection Connect/Disconnect selected peripheral device. Secondary page Import the contacts from the selected telephone Update to store them in the audio system. Bluetooth connection Delete Delete the selected telephone. Confirm Save the settings.
Telephone Telephone connection
Secondary page Devices detected Audio streaming Start the search for peripheral devices.
Search for Internet devices Cut out the microphone temporarily so that the Put on hold contact cannot hear your conversation with a passenger. Telephone Import the contacts from the selected telephone Update connection to save then in the audio system.
Secondary page Ringtones Choose the telephone ringtone and volume.
Telephone Options Contact records used and free, percentage of Memory info. storage space used by internal contacts and Bluetooth® contacts. Confirm Save the settings. . 63
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Pairing a Bluetooth® telephone
For reasons of safety and because they Procedure from the system require prolonged attention on the part Activate the telephone's Bluetooth® function Select the name of the of the driver, the operations for pairing and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone desired peripheral from the ® the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the configuration). list and "Confirm". hands-free system of the audio system must be carried out with the vehicle Press on Telephone to display the stationary. primary page. Enter a code of at least 4 figures for the connection then "Confirm".
Procedure (short) from the Press on the secondary page. telephone Enter this same code in the telephone then In the Bluetooth® menu of your device, select accept the connection. the system name in the list of devices detected. Select "Bluetooth connection". The system offers to connect the telephone: - in "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone Enter a code of at least 4 figures in the device only), and confirm. Select "Search for devices". - in "Audio streaming" (streaming: wireless The list of telephones detected is playing of audio files from the telephone), Enter this same code in the system, displayed. - in "Internet" (internet browsing, only if your select "OK" and confirm. telephone is compatible with the "DUN" Dial-Up Networking Bluetooth® standard). If the telephone is not detected, it is Select one or more profiles and confirm. recommended that you switch the Bluetooth® function on your telephone off and then on again.
64
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Connecting a Bluetooth® peripheral device Automatic reconnection On switching on the ignition, the telephone The services available depend Depending on the type of telephone, connected when the ignition was last switched on the network, the SIM card and the system will ask you to accept or not off is automatically reconnected, if this ® the compatibility of the Bluetooth the transfer of your contacts. connection mode had been activated during the telephone used. Check the telephone If not, select "Update". pairing procedure. manual and with your network The connection is confirmed by the display of a provider for details of the services message and the name of the telephone. available to you. Manual connection On return to the vehicle, if the last telephone The ability of the system to connect Press on Telephone to display the connected is present again, it is reconnected with only one profile depends on the primary page. automatically and within around 30 seconds telephone. The three profiles may all after switching on the ignition the pairing is connect by default. done without any action on your part, (with Press on the secondary page. Bluetooth® activated). Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information To modify the automatic connection mode, (compatibility, additional help, ...). select the telephone in the list then select the Select "Bluetooth" to display the list desired profile. of paired peripherals. The recognised telephone appears in the list. Select the peripheral to connect.
Press on "Search for devices".
Depending on your telephone, you may be asked to accept automatic connection every The connection is confirmed by the display of a time the ignition is switched on. message and the name of the telephone. . 65
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Managing paired Receiving a call Making a call telephones An incoming call is announced by a ring and a This function allows the connection or Using the telephone is not superimposed display in the screen. disconnection of a peripheral device as recommended while driving. well as the deletion of a pairing. Make a short press on the steering Park the vehicle. Make the call using the steering mounted TEL button to accept an Press on Telephone to display the incoming call. mounted controls. primary page. Make a long press Calling a new number Press on the secondary page. Press on Telephone to display the on the steering mounted TEL button primary page. Select "Bluetooth" to display the list to reject the call. of paired peripheral devices. Enter the phone number using the digital keypad. Or Select the peripheral in the list. Press "Call" to start the call. Select " ". Select "Search for devices" End call Calling a contact Press on Telephone to display the Or primary page. "Connect / Disconnect" to start or end the Bluetooth connection with the selected device. Or make a long press
Or "Delete" to delete the pairing. on the steering mounted TEL button.
66
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Managing contacts / entries
Select "Contacts". Press on Telephone to display the Select "By name" to view the list of primary page. contacts.
Select the desired contact from the list offered. Select "Contacts".
Select "Call".
Select "View".
Calling a recently used number Select "Create" to add a new contact, observing the "international format". Press on Telephone to display the primary page. Or "Modify" to edit the selected contact. Select "Call log".
Or Select the desired contact from the list offered. "Delete" to delete the selected contact. It is always possible to make a call directly from the telephone; park the Or vehicle first as a safety measure. "Delete all" to delete all information for the selected contact. . 67
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics Frequently asked questions The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system. Navigation
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION The route calculation is not The route settings may conflict with the current location (exclusion of Check the route settings in the "Navigation" successful. toll roads on a toll motorway). menu.
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The Risk areas audible The audible warning is not active. Activate audible warnings in the "Navigation" warning does not work. menu.
The system does not The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages. Select the "Information" function in the list of route suggest a detour around an settings. incident on the route.
I receive a Risk areas alert Other than guidance, the system announces all Risk areas Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of which is not on my route. positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an the Risk areas. Select "On the route" to no longer alert for Risk areas located on nearby or parallel roads. receive alerts other than navigation instructions or to reduce the time for the announcement.
68
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION Certain traffic jams along On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive Wait until the traffic information is being received the route are not indicated the traffic information. correctly (display of the traffic information icons in real time. on the map).
The filters are too restrictive. Modify the settings.
In certain countries, only major routes (e.g. motorways) are listed for This phenomenon is normal. The system is the traffic information. dependent on the traffic information available.
The altitude is not On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to Wait until the system has started up completely so displayed. receive more than 4 satellites correctly. that there is GPS coverage by at least 4 satellites.
Depending on the geographical environment (e.g. tunnel) or the This phenomenon is normal. The system weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary. is dependent on the GPS signal reception conditions.
. 69
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Radio
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION The quality of reception of The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station Activate the "RDS" function by means of the the radio station listened listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area short-cut menu to enable the system to check to gradually deteriorates through which the vehicle is travelling. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in or the stored stations do the geographical area. not function (no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed, etc.). The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate block reception, including in RDS mode. a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer. through a car wash or into an underground car park).
I cannot find some radio The station is not received or its name has changed in the list. Press and hold the "List" button at the steering stations in the list of mounted controls to update the list of stations stations received. received or press on the system update function: "Update list". Some radio stations send other information in place of their name (the title of the song, for example). The name of the radio The system interprets this information as the name of the station. station changes.
70
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Media
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION Playback of my USB Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down Delete the files supplied with the memory stick memory stick starts only access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the and limit the number of sub-folders in the file after a very long wait catalogue time). structure on the memory stick. (around 2 to 3 minutes).
When I connect my iPhone When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port (the as a telephone and to the the streaming function. The streaming function takes the place of USB function takes priority over streaming). USB port at the same time, the USB function which is then not useable, there is a period without I am unable to play the sound of the track being played with Apple® players. music files.
The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any Check that the CD is inserted in the player the automatically or is not audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. right way up. played by the player. Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the player (udf, etc.). played if it is too badly damaged. Check the content in the case of a recorded CD: The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is refer to the advice in the "AUDIO" section. not recognised by the audio system. The audio system's CD player does not play DVDs. Some recorded CDs will not be played by the audio system because they are not of adequate quality.
There is a long waiting period When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount This phenomenon is normal. following the insertion of a of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from CD or connection of a USB a few seconds to a few minutes. memory stick. . 71
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable poor. conditions.
The audio system settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambience.
Some characters in the The audio system does not display some types of characters. Use standard characters to name tracks and media information are not folders. displayed correctly while playing.
Playing of streaming files The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device. does not start.
The names of tracks and The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information. the track length are not displayed on the screen when streaming audio.
72
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Settings
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION When changing the The selection of an ambience imposes the settings for treble and Modify the settings for treble and bass or then settings for treble and bass. ambience setting to obtain the desired sound bass, the ambience is Modifying one without the other is not possible. environment. deselected.
When changing the ambience, the settings for treble and bass return to zero.
When changing the The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings. Modify the balance or distribution settings to balance settings, the Modifying one without the other is not possible. obtain the desired sound environment. distribution setting is deselected.
When changing the distribution setting, the balance settings are deselected.
When the "All passengers" The choice of an "All passengers" distribution setting can be Modify the distribution setting using the slider on mode is selected, the programmed. the touch screen. distribution is not as I would like. . 73
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Loudness, Check that the audio settings (Loudness, sound quality between the Ambience, Treble, Bass, Volume can be adapted to the different Ambience, Treble, Bass, Volume) are adapted to different audio sources. sound sources, which may result in audible differences when the sources listened to. Adjust Balance, Treble changing source. and Bass to the middle position, select the "None" musical ambience and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
With the engine off, the When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery system switches off after a depends on the state of charge of the battery. charge. few minutes of use. The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
74
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
Telephone
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION I cannot connect my The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is Bluetooth telephone. telephone may not be visible. switched on. Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. You can check the compatibility of your telephone at www.peugeot.co.uk (services).
The volume of the The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system, to telephone connected maximum if required, and increase the volume of in Bluetooth mode is the telephone if necessary. inaudible. The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone Reduce the ambient noise level (close the communication. windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, etc.). Some contacts are The options for synchronising contacts are synchronising the Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display duplicated in the list. contacts on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. telephone contacts". When both synchronisations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.
Contacts are not shown in Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings Modify the display settings in the telephone alphabetical order. chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order. directory.
The system does not receive The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to SMS text messages. the system. . 75
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016 Audio and Telematics
76
2008-additif_en_Chap12b_SMEGplus_ed01-2016